Home

Printronix LQH-HWTM Printer User Manual

1. L 288 EVEU Example tiere a utem 289 Table of Contents l Introduction About this Manual This manual explains how to use the igP PGL Intelligent Graphics Printing Printronix Graphics Language on line matrix printers Use this manual and your printer User s Guide for complete printer IGP compatibility Warnings and Special Information Information requiring special attention is indicated under special headings Always read and comply with this information The heading reveals the nature of the information Warning Warning messages call attention to situations that 7 could hurt you or damage the equipment Caution Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment Note A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and maintenance The IGP PGL Emulation The IGP PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor IGP for the line matrix printers It is based on and is compatible with the Printronix IGP 100 200 400 board using the Printronix Graphics Language PGL Features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a preprinted look for each application IGP programs control all graphic functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Chapter 14 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Graphic capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal line
2. Nd Ba ED rper UPPER GUARD BAND i d 1 I l QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal D Ej cove HEIGHT d LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND HEIGHT STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE CODE ZONE I INV a UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 11 Code 128 Structure 108 Code 128A 128B and 128C Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code both automatically provided by the IGP Code 128A Data Field Although the command field does not allow the selection of Code A the IGP does encode these characters if found in the data Code 128B Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set 96 ASCII characters and seven control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules Each character consists of three bars and
3. kid 261 Horizontal Line Errors dads 262 Vertical Linie Errors iiss ioi e 263 Box so RE aea ee 264 Gorner EITOLS amu ee Hectore iet ire dist 265 Alpha Errors te Deam m d e ntes 266 Logo Errors 2 2 5 ui oe ced Sel p edens 267 Greate ETrorS z etos ico eto nn ectetur or cocco ote tute 268 Execute Errors 5o ce ERR me Ce s SSS 269 Miscellaneous Errors rtt Herten 270 BarCode eta 271 Reverse Print Niet Melee eg tee oc ha 273 Incremental Fields Errors 274 Multinational Character Set 274 A Standard ASCII Character Set 277 B Grid Programs and Samples 279 Table of Contents C Vertical Paper 283 283 Paper Motion Using Line Feeds and Form 283 Paper Motion Using the PI Line Relative Line Slewing 283 Paper Motion Using the 285 General EVFU Programming sse 285 EVFU Programming 285 Using the EVEU uw akuy rare ede t ts 286 Clearing the EVFU Memory
4. 122 Figure 15 Sample EAN 8 Bar Codes SC 55 SC 15 s Sa SR33 22 SR33 t n F EAN 13 EAN 13 The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 16 and described on the following pages SR SC START CODE CENTER CODE POSITION Ny pera CODE 1 T7777 QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA quiet Normal ZONE FIELD FIELD I ZONE HEIGHT 1 NUMBER 1 SYSTEM 9 N _ __ un cn S es o Ca MR ENS CHARACTER 1 CHECK NUMBER DIGIT CHECK SYSTEM FIELD BB A DIGIT CHARACTER SR SC FIELD POSITION EAS un 1 INV QUIET 1 QUIET ZONE i ZONE HEIGHT RIGHT DATA LEFT DATA 1 I FIELD STOP CODE CENTER CODE START CODE NUMBER eee INT JE I SYSTEM CHARACTER sae l SR SC POSITION SR SC POSITION CHECK DIGIT 9 OPTIONAL HIELD READABL DATA FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Quer Zone NUMBER L N SYSTEM CHARACTER e HEIGHT gt gt 16 13 123 Chapter 124 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The IGP automatically produces an 11 module wide left quiet zone you are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the right quiet zone The n
5. HEIGHT Code 93 Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm 103 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Code 93 Command Format BARCODE CODE93 DIR MAG Hn m BFn LJ DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE CODE93 Designates bar code type Code 93 enter CODE93 DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for cou
6. 25 1 Execute the form form count of 1 5 52 SR 44 gt SC 27 24686642 TA Figure 23 Sample 1 2 5 Bar Codes SR 49 140 Matrix Matrix The structure for the Matrix bar code is shown in Figure 24 and described on the following pages 71 QUIETI QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE A 1 0 OPTIONAL CHECK e 1 1 1 I I I I I I pem COW CW i OPTIONAL i i READABLE i DATA i FIELD i 1 1 1 1 OPTIONAL 1 1 CHECK i DIGIT UPPER LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD j GUARD GUARD 821 GUARD BAND BAND QUIET ZONE e HEIGHT HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION g ms m UPPER GUARD BAND i I 3 nr 1 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal ZONE CODE CODE zone HEIGHT l J l LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Leow 3 LOWER GUARD BAND I I f 7 HEIGHT INV 1 QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE ol 1 ss I UPPER GUARD BAND m J am OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 24 Matrix Structure 141 Chapter 142 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quie
7. 68 Eontzr ana tate tees 69 Form ii eso CREER Ses 70 Ignore Sequencoe entrent nns 71 Line SpacinQ ide eb RR re 71 Lines 72 Lines Vertical ttt o eri tite illu turtur 73 Listemi T aa PTS 74 Logo Call us ann aed edite san 74 Logo Mode Create 76 Normal 78 PagerNUm ber cc 78 plc 79 Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 79 Paper Instruction 80 Pant rl en ette A etui Le i 80 eer X ES 81 Recalll e 81 pisci EN LC mE 82 Heve rse Print iota Mte er dte deed DU 82 RII 83 SESH OMA Liners EE 84 SOLU P 85 Table of Contents O BarCode Sise 87 NM ERE 87 User Defined Variable Bar Code 89 PDF Character Sizes PDF FONT 90 Bar CodeS iiti e t He a e eei 91 Godabalr tet e au e 91 oL 96 Code 99 x e asam Ee dedu a vun E ede ERE edes 102 Code 128A 128B and 128 108 EAN ee et 118 EAN iU uit de ep ues 123 IM sun tetro ets aie tamdiu 129 Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 1 2
8. NORMAL The Normal mode command If the form count parameter was not used in the Execute command enter the SFCC and NORMAL to return the IGP to the Normal mode The Normal mode command is input following all other Execute commands to enter variable data Refer to the following sections Input a line terminator to leave a blank line before entering the Normal command Execute Form Electronic Vertical Format Unit Purpose Provides an efficient method of rapidly slewing paper Mode EXECUTE Format See Appendix C Comments The Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU is processed as overlay data within the Execute Form mode Detailed EVFU information is provided in Appendix C The EVFU must be loaded while in the Execute Form mode and immediately following the Execute command After executing the form and returning to Normal mode the EVFU information is automatically deleted from printer memory To print the form again re send the EVFU command Several key points to operating the EVFU are listed below Send EVFU commands immediately following the Execute command or the format form feeds The EVFU can be unloaded by issuing an END LOAD command only The number of lines slewed is dictated by the current line spacing setting In those circumstances where the EVFU is being used to control the forms length only the IGP forms length parameter can be used in place of the EVFU The maximum number of EVF
9. CREATE BARCODE 103030231231023010312301 uH CA TOP D EX POSTBAR ECUT E POSTBAR 1 4 2 Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command PostBar bar code at SR 10 SC 0 with default Mag 1 3210212112210 Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form with a form count of 1 SC 40 SR 10 Figure 34 Sample PostBar bar code X1 Magnification Telepen Telepen The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 35 and described on the following pages 71 QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 0 OPTIONAL CHECK e 1 1 1 I l CCW CW OPTIONAL i READABLE DATA FIELD i I I I I OPTIONAL i 1 CHECK i DIGIT UPPER LOWER LOWER i UPPER GUARD GUARD GUARD I 47 GUARD BAND i BAND BAND BAND QUIET ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT gt I OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION a I UPPER GUARD BAND I DUM 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD stop quiet Normal ZONE CODE CODE zone HEIGHT PE LOWER GUARD BAND TN Sed OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 6 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD 3 LOWER GUARD BAND I I 1 i 1 HEIGHT NV I QUIET STOP DATA FIELD ST
10. Figure 49 Auto Increment Fields Example 227 Chapter 4 Form Exercise Form Exercise 228 In the following example you will create and execute a form Using character scaling discussed in detail on page 83 on a 60 x 72 dot per inch dpi grid your form will include the following abox of corners e vertical lines alphanumeric data horizontal lines abarcode This exercise will help you become familiar with the IGP by taking you through 14 steps to build a complete form Detailed command descriptions for producing forms bar codes and logos are described in the Commands chapter All the data and commands for the form are entered into a file in the host computer The filename used in this exercise is PRACTC FRM and the form name used is PRACTICE If another form named PRACTICE already exists it will be deleted by this exercise Begin each step by reading the explanation The information you input is listed under the word Enter The parameters of each command have a specific order for data entry input the data exactly as shown but always use the actual SFCC required by your system where the is shown The general command format is listed under the word Format next to each example The SFCC is represented by cc in the general format Use the standard commands on your system to open close or print the file with the form data where your system format is required Note Do not
11. 55555 SR 39 15 Field plus 5 digit add on data field table Data Field Bar Code command Field plus 5 digit add on data field table Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Creat Executes the form form Form mode count of 1 SC 50 173 w sss ua un pr Drs v3 u Figure 39 Sample UPC A Bar Codes with Add On Data UPC E and UPC E0 UPC E and UPC EO The UPC E UPC EO bar code structure is shown in Figure 40 and described on the following pages START STOP CODE CODE PX Normal d 205 HEIGHT per CODE Y I F L 2x SYSTEM NUMBER SYSTEM BEADABLE DIGIT SYSTEM CHARACTER CHARACTER FIELD DATAFIELD CHARACTER DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 1 quiet QUIET INV HEIGHT ZONE zone 1 1 N NUMBER SYSTEM NUMBER SYSTEM CHECK DIGIT CHARACTER CHARACTER FIELD CHARACTER p ER N or 5 NUMBER IGI NI SYSTEM ADD ON ae QUIET CHARACTER I POSITION C 1 4 CHECK DIGIT START CODE QUIT CHARACTER SR SC CCW POSITION 1 CW NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER FIELD 77 STOP CODE READABLE DATA FIELD READABLE lt DATA FIELD STOP CODE NUMBER SYSTEM START CODE FIELD N NUMBER PE SYSTEM CHARACTER ZONE EII HEIGHT gt CHARACTER QUIET C CHECK DIGIT ZONE CHARACTER
12. Figure 14 EAN 8 Structure 118 EAN 8 Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping The IGP automatically produces the left quiet zone you must provide sufficient space on the form for the right quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data placed at the end of the bar code typically identifies a periodical issue number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifie
13. Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data field is placed at the end of the bar code and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm UPC A UPC A Command Format BARCODE UPC A n DIR SCB MAG Hn m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE UPC A Designates bar code type UPC A enter UPC A n Optional parameter to
14. PUTERS ALLEN ND O ST R 97601 Multiple page documents must be separated by a form feed the page of data includes the Execute command the dynamic data commands and the Normal command Using the SFON command described on page 84 a form feed command will allow as many forms as required to print with the appropriate new data supplied dynamically When the SFOFF command is used send a hex OC instead of FF to print multiple pages with new dynamic data 223 Chapter 4 Form Examples NL ACME MOTOR 17500 CARTHRIGHT RD ca 92714 Ad 7o 71 Rs 5 dus Los ASIE CA 90091 x nam LITT ACME MOTOR 17500 CARTHRIGHT RD seme CA 92714 _ E 18 CORPORATION 1234 ANYWHERE ST YOUR TOWN O3498 KUL LU LLL P N 19 COMPUTERS 845 ALLEN ques T BEND OR amm P N mawaa ACME MOTOR 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD L IRVINE CA 92714 d Ty M H INC 101 BEACH RD 97772 COO ACME MOTOR 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD IRVINE CA 92714 _ 71 Figure 48 Dynamic Data Example Example Dynamic Data Example Auto Increment Fields The following program designed in accordance with current specifications for AIAG B 3 shipping label standards creates four automatica
15. 1 OPTIONAL i READABLE i i DATA i i FIELD i OPTIONAL 1 CHECK 1 DIGIT UPPER LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD 4 GUARD GUARD 821 J GUARD BAND j QUIET ZONE ke HEIGHT ke HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC mit POSITION Seimei a tare el ols eral UPPER GUARD BAND i disini l QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIE Normal 125 D Ej 85 8981 HEIGHT E LOWER GUARD BAND 2 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION A OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND 1 A HEIGHT STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET CODE CODE zONE I QUIET INV ZONE UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 8 Code 39 Structure 96 Code 39 Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to repres
16. HEIGHT Figure 40 UPC E and UPC EO0 Structure 191 Chapter 192 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The IGP automatically produces an 11 module wide left quiet zone You must provide sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the right quiet zone The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Stop Codes The start stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field for all UPC E and UPC EO0 bar codes must be zero Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules For UPC E eleven digits are expected which are compressed down to the six encoded symbol characters For UPC EO six compressed digits are expected The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data field is placed at the end of the bar code and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be sup
17. Hw QF ANM o 0 T O H CC 52 gt ZX gt N 1 ECO gt gt moouuuoormnv zzzo I Ac kus De vakt S N m O lt m O QD utu L GERMAN Set ASCII Set 01234567 01234567 G C C 0 b 3 gt Z X gt N G O 3 a CAUT OL rnve ECO C oOmurL 25 zExX NWQOOD e u noouiuLuUrmBor arzzo AG vakt elon N m tO O N 0 O lt m O Q Li L QUOtup2 5zX25Nw n nl G Q O O Q i D O gt Zx gt N Z G a mumonouluLmuUrmaeunoxur zrzzo CHANMTNORDA VI Ac mr Fw de o wank lors CHANMTNORDMDATNOVAWL 257 Accessing Characters and Character Sets 5 Chapter DANISH Set SWEDISH Set 012346567 N Ko LO iM N GTO UD YW G monu 69 de I lt m O DQ Li OHNA 3k Doe N m sri gt EBEXANBROD ECO gt Z x gt N w S lt lt LO p err 5 zo eVi 4 wank c O IN 0 O lt m O DO t L gt Z X gt N G O 0 2 E C O gt x gt NN lt O lt gt 2 ONOM VI Ac 4 E x O N 0 O lt m O DQ Li L FINNISH Set 01234567 NORWEGIAN Set 01234567 B C C gt
18. Mode CREATE Format CORNER LT SR SC ER EC VL HL STOP CORNER LT SR SC ER EC VL HL The Corner command enter CORNER Corners expand down and to the right from the given row and column Defines the line thickness measured in dots Line thickness is based on dot dimensions of 1 72 inch both horizontally and vertically so that line thickness is equal in both directions Enter a value of 1 or greater Defines the starting row of the corner Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the corner Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the ending row of the corner Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the ending column of the corner Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP forma
19. Pese ESSI an o Oo b 012 Rg s zm N N mom N N gt o O O Qm O o O N o o m o o IO 8 gt Oa oO KVO NJ o wo looo ROB Oo RO ooo Nan oan N JOO m gt 0 an ow N o gt ajoo Oo JOON IO TON m m o UO NOH a ops RO an 8 ROE aos AN No A N 2 Bo Bo gt AN AN AN AN S 3 Bo Appendix A 278 Grid Programs and Samples The Standard Grid The standard grid is used for form design The program for the standard grid is listed below and a sample of the standard grid follows on the next page Photocopy the grid provided or enter the grid program and make your own printout CREATE GRID HDUP 7 amp 5 1 VERT ek ESL STOP OF F HDUP 7 10 VERT 1 5 1 61 5 2 10 1 61 5 STOP HDUP OFF VERT 2 75 1 61 5 STOP VDUP 61 1 HORZ 1 1 1 75 STOP VDUP OFF VDUP 6 10 HORZ 1 5 1 76 2 10 1 7 6 STOP
20. X D n Y D n Hn Designates bar code type PDF417 enter PDF417 Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to designate the width of the narrow element in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch or if the D is given in target dots The default size is 1 60th of an inch Optional parameter to designate the height of the bar code in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch or if the D is given in target dots The default size is 2 72nd of an inch Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of the bar code symbol including human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 4 through 9 9 inches Parameters Wn Rn Cn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used Optional parameter for the maximum width of the symbol based on the narrow element width Enter Wn where nis the overall width in tenths of an inch Parameters Hn Rn Cnor ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used ASPECT h w Optional parameter for specifying the symbol Hn Cn height to width ratio where h is the height and wis the width both expressed as integers The default is 1 2 Parameters Hn Wn Rn or Cn cannot be entered
21. imm 24688642 SR 32 Figure 27 Sample MSI Bar Codes 152 PDF417 PDF417 The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 28 and described on the following pages EU QUIET I SR S SR SC ZONE I POSITION POSITION P 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CCW i i 1 CW 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 UPPER LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD gt J4 GUARD GUARD CODE J GUARD BAND BAND BAND BAND 2 as onc J 2 ee Meer zs POSITION q UPPER GUARD BAND eS 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD QUIET Normal ZONE ZONE 1 1 1 L i PEE LOWER GUARD BAND 25722 ee 2l Figure 28 PDF417 Structure 153 Chapter 154 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Data Field PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data The first three are pre established the remaining nine are user modes which can be defined by users or industry as
22. 19 Chapter 20 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Execute Form Mode The Execute Form Mode prints forms created in the Create Form Mode Execute Form Mode commands are summarized in Table 3 and fully described on the referenced pages Carriage Return Form Feed and Line Feed commands also operate in the Execute Form Mode The EXECUTE Form command must be entered in UPPERCASE and a single line spacing or a line containing overlay data must separate an EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command Note 1 Some systems pad the data stream with characters and spaces If the IGP file on your system contains padded characters or spaces before the SFCC this data must be ignored before the IGP can operate The Ignore Sequence IGON IGOFF command discussed on page 71 is provided for this purpose At times you may also need the IGP to ignore host originated paper movement commands carriage return line feed form feed etc in lengthy data streams Select Format SFON SFOFF discussed on page 84 is provided for this purpose In addition the Quiet command page 81 can be used to pass data unchanged to the printer Modes of Operation Table 3 Execute Form Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Description Page Compressed Print DENSITY Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch cpi 45 Dynamic AFn Executes the dynamic alphanumeric data provided after the 62 Alphanumeric Data cc EXECUTE command Dy
23. DARK POINT HSn or HSDn SR SC VE HE D text D STOP ALPHA The Alphanumeric command enter ALPHA R The optional reverse printing white on black parameter Enter R to specify a black background Note The D parameter used in earlier IGP PGL versions is ignored In addition the L parameter also used in earlier IGP PGL versions to specify a long reverse field for descending characters in dynamic alphanumeric data is provided automatically The IGP PGL will ignore these parameters if found in a command line E The optional elongated character parameter Enter E to specify elongated character printing Elongated characters are double height and single width If used the VE and HE parameters must be 7set to 0 or an error message will result Elongated character printing is also available with rotated alphanumerics Cn The optional horizontal compression parameter Enter C and replace n with 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 to specify the number of horizontal characters per inch cpi 10 cpi is the default value 10A 10 cpi OCR A 10B 10 cpi OCR B If used the VE and HE parameters must be set to 0 or an error message will result AFn L The optional dynamic data field parameters for identifying the alohanumeric string location on a form and for designating the length of the alphanumeric string If these parameters are used the actual text can not be entered during the Create Form mode it must be entered dyn
24. gt gt gt gt gt UU gt gt gt U UU gt U U gt gt gt gt gt U gt gt gt gt U gt U gt U gt 127 Chapter 128 3 Bar Codes EAN 13 Example Figure 17 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 13 bar code generated by the following program CR BARCODE EAN1345 D 28 15 AN13 12345678987655555 PDF STOP BARCODE 13 5 5 12 27 49 12345678987655555 PDF STOF D D EXE EAN13 1 0 RMAL SC 15 SC 49 _ SR27 89826 as n r Figure 17 Sample EAN 13 Bar Codes FIM FIM The FIM Facing Identification Mark bar code structure is shown in Figure 18 and Figure 19 and described on the following pages The left boundary must begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece The right most bar must be 2 inches 1 8 inch from the right edge of the mail piece Bars must be 5 8 inch 1 8 inch tall the top of the bars must be no lower than 1 8 inch from the top edge of the mail piece and may touch the top edge of the mail piece The bar code baseline must be within 1 8 inch from the bottom edge of the clear zone SR SC POSITION NOTE Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area Optional Line NON
25. 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 k Note The ASCII values in Table 25 assume that all undefined bits I are set to 0 When the PI line is enabled data bit 8 is the PI line a serial interface and data bit 8 is undefined on a parallel interface 287 Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU Table 26 EVFU Codes PI Line Disabled or Not Used ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec 10 16 11 17 12 18 13 19 14 20 15 21 16 22 17 23 18 24 19 25 1A 26 1B 27 1C 28 FS 1D 29 GS 1E 30 RS Start Load 1F 31 US End Load X Undefined 0 or 1 0 Low TOF IO O N 13 14 ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 oj ioi ioi ioi ijioi ioi ioi ijol jiz Note Do not use your SFCC as a channel code when using the EVFU Clearing the EVFU Memory The following actions reset clear the EVFU memory 1 Sending only the start load code 2 Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code 3 start load code is received resulting in re initialization of the EVFU This restarts t
26. 23921 24 1 25 1 2671 29 29s 30 1 Sls 32841 34 1 35 1 36 1 38 395 40 1 2 3 4 5j 6 7 8 49 50 51 525 537 54 557 56 END ROB BB BR uS LOG 45 CRE 9 44 7 42 6 39 4 36 1 34 34 1 57 4 24 7 23 8 23 9 23 11 24 12 25 14 27 15 30 17 32 18 33 22 34 25 25 26 36 28 37 30 37 32 37 33 37 35 36 rA EFTHAND ATE 0 33 D ECUTE EFTHAND RMAL COLUMN 33 lt ROW 45 Page Layout Considerations Form Design In this exercise you will produce a complete form by sketching it out on a grid in the same way the logo was designed Again this exercise uses character scaling on an 8 1 2 x 11 inch 60 x 72 dpi page Refer to page 83 where character scaling is discussed in detail Page Layout Considerations At 6 lines per inch Ipi and 10 characters per inch cpi printing a standard 8 1 2 x 11 inch sheet of paper has a print area of 66 lines rows and 85 characters columns The printable area will vary if you are not printing at 6 and 10 cpi Thus the grid used to design an 8 1 2 x 11 inch form should accommodate this 66 x 85 area Using the grids provided in Appendix B sketch out the form layout and identify the starting and ending values These values will be used to input IGP command parameters Planning the Form Layout In this exa
27. 9 UPPER GUARD BAND I E qe 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD stop quiet Normal ZONE CODE CODE zone HEIGHT ee LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION 6 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Ele 3 LOWER GUARD BAND I I 1 i 1 HEIGHT NV I QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE l 4 I S I UPPER GUARD BAND L z z a m s 3 as OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 44 UPS 11 Structure 203 Chapter 204 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the UPS 11 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code both automatically provided by the IGP PGL Data Field UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 page 108 This bar code is restricted to 10 data characters The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9 Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar cod
28. Code UCC EAN 128 Examples The following example generates the SSCC 18 variant of an UCC EAN 128 bar code in horizontal orientation at the default ratio and vertically at a user defined ratio of double normal size CREATE UCCTEST Horizontal bar code is dark nominal width start row 35 start column 15 Human readable field is below the bar code in OCR B font BARCODE UCC 128 DARK 35 15 0034567890123456789 PDF X STOP Vertical bar code is dark double width start row 35 start column 50 Human readable data field is above the bar code in normal 10 cpi font BARCODE UCC 128 VSCAN XR2 2 4 4 6 6 8 8 H12 DARK 35 50 0034567890123456789 PDF A TOP D EXECUTE UCCTEST uH CA NORMAL MAA A 00 3456 7890123456 7895 182 UCC EAN 128 The program below illustrates incremental UCC EAN 128 bar codes Incremental UCC EAN 128 bar code syntax requires that the STARTMASK field be one character wider than the data field Put an extra X on the left side of the STARTMASK since the data is right justified in the STARTMASK field CRE Purc Note JP the BARCODE ATE UCCINC 140 hase Order number incremental that there are 14 characters in the data nd the STARTMASK is 15 characters wide he mask is set to increment only the last five numbers of data UCC 128 I DARK 3 20 XXXXXXXX
29. D gt Z X gt N G O G 3 A CC FF D gt Zx gt lt lt m OQ ul GT JEZO OndNomsiuiuvoNMoOo eviAc M ves x 0 O N 0 O lt m O DQ u L QUtup2 5ZX NHHIGS Uocoo0ouU0ovcoccovc tto t O x i 2 gt Z x gt N w OD wu modonuiumormunozarzzo OANMNTNONRDA V I AG b Dae Bs C ak eb oN O FN lt m O O L L 258 Multinational Character Sets DUTCH Set ENGLISH Set 012 3 4 5 6 7 LO e N gt z X gt NVP E C O gt 2 ONDA At 4 c lt m O Q Li L 9 gt gt 1 8 20 DA Ac ot SCANMTNORDACMOOwWL SPANISH Set 01 2 345617 FRENCH Set 012346567 C 0 b D gt Z X gt N OCO w gt gt amp mononuumorimu nonv rzzo AG vakt oc t0 O i O O lt m O Q ui L CC 0 P 35 gt z X gt N D Iwe 008 DOrnveECO 2 gt Zx gt NCOGOG MO monuludormoj3nrz rzzo HAHNIA OF OO eVI Ac HARD vakt s 0 O FN O O lt m O Q Li L 259 Accessing Characters and Character Sets 5 Chapter TURKISH Set ITALIAN Set 01
30. Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters A null data field no characters is permitted The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 9 except the SFCC The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code
31. Disabled Non Zero Enabled UPC DESCENDERS 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled 47 Chapter 2 Command Codes Comments The IGP PGL configuration parameters available are defined in your User s Guide Any or all parameters can be used within one CONFIG command and they can be listed in any order List each parameter value on a separate line terminating with the END command Default configuration values can be reset using the CONFIG command Parameters not followed by a value and parameters followed by any non zero value are interpreted as true or enabled values For carriage return and line feed definitions a zero value does not change the data stream However for non zero values a carriage return character or line feed character will be interpreted as a carriage return plus a line feed Parameters not listed in this command remain unchanged If a parameter error is detected for parameters other than O or 1 i e SFCC Top Bottom Margin Left Margin the value will default to the current configuration from disk flash Example 1 The following command enables IGP PGL Auto Wrap disables Auto Eject and selects 6 Ipi printing CONFIG AUTO WRAP 1 AUTO EJECT 0 6 END Example 2 The following command resets all control panel IGP PGL configuration parameters back to default values CONFIG RESET END 48 Corners Corners Purpose Defines corner sets
32. Each row is entered on a separate line After all the dot positions are entered terminate the Create Logo mode by entering an End command line Use the Special Function Control Character and Create command to create a form with the form name LEFTHAND To add the logo to the form input a Create Form mode Logo Call command identify the logo starting row SR 45 and starting column SC 33 and specify the logo to use by its name HAND Stop the Logo command and end the Create Form mode Enter Format CREATE LEFTHAND CREATE formname FL LOGO LOGO 45 33 HAND SR SC logoname STOP STOP END END Input the Special Function Control Character and Execute command for the LEFTHAND form just created Input a blank line the Special Function Control Character and the Normal command to instruct the IGP to return to the Normal mode after execution Enter Format EXECUTE LEFTHAND cc EXECUTE formname PAGE FC NORMAL cc NORMAL Use system commands to exit the HNDLGO FOM file and print The finished program and logo should look like the following sample If error messages occur refer to Solving Program Errors on page 248 LOGO HAND 56 60 1 40 42 2 38 42 3 36 42 4 35 42 5 33 41 6 31 40 7 30 38 8 29 36 9 28 35 237 Chapter 238 4 Logo Exercise 10 27 34 52 54 11 24 33 48 54 12 22 31 45 54 13 19 30 41 54 14 16 29 38 53 15 13 29 36 51 16 11 29 33 48 L4 18 1 9 20 21 22 1
33. MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE TELEPEN DIR MAG Hn m Designates bar code type Telepen enter TELEPEN Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments plus dots enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field W
34. The parameters of the Expand command are improperly specified Either the parameters are out of bounds or some type of format error was detected The command is ignored and processing continues Bar Code Errors 90 91 92 Insufficient memory to store the BARCODE No more room exists in the IGP memory for another bar code The rest of the bar code commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Then processing continues ALPHA BARCODE syntax error Some type of syntax format error was detected in the parameters of the bar code command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a Misspelled keywords b Lowercase used c A missing semicolon d A colon in place of a semicolon e An ending delimiter for the data field was not found f Too many or too few parameters in the command string The rest of the command line is flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue BARCODE magnification factor MAG out of bounds or not allowed The magnification factor specified in the bar code command is out of bounds Refer to the applicable section in the Bar Codes chapter to determine the acceptable magnification values for the bar code symbol being used 271 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 93 BARCODE starting row SR out of bounds The starting row parameter in the bar code command will cause the bar code symbol to print either above or below the limits of t
35. Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements In the bar code two characters are interleaved paired bars are used to represent the first character in the pair and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair German 2 5 and 14 are special cases of Interleaved 2 5 bar codes While Interleaved 2 5 has a variable data field German 1 2 5 is restricted to 11 or 13 digits and ITF 14 is restricted to 13 digits Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Interleaved 2 5 can be printed with or without a check digit but German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 have the check digit automatically included Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 2 5 Command Format BARCODE I 2 5 CD or I25GERMAN or ITF14 DIR MAG BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE 1 2 5 CD Designates bar code type Interleaved 2 5 enter 1
36. Warnings and Special 13 The IGP PGL Emulation nnne nnns 13 Features eod AREE 13 How the IGP Operates 14 Modes of Operalion a 15 Alphanumeric Data w dnt terrere erg tte 22 Incremental Data eere ree 22 Commands eeann 23 IGP Command 23 Special Function Control Code 23 Semicolon 3 3 oed seti ded ue 23 DBDpD8fG888 u u tie ial seein ua 23 Inline Commiands oett o P tA cete 23 Line Terminator ait beiden Susa iteration Bu iibi 24 Printable Gharactet x eee er deo creer 24 SDa6G8S eR 24 Command Parameters 24 Form e 24 RO at Ree 25 Numeric Values uu c Ned tin heehee Sd 25 Comments in Command 25 ree dae N Datel eect Aes sh sacs De cde acd cd E ea 25 Character Position Dot Position CP DP 26 Command 1 27 Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data 27 Dark Printing etg rot
37. code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The data field must be numeric and contain exactly 5 9 or 11 digits d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information 164 SR SC D data field STOP PostBar and Royal Mail KIX Defines the starting row for the bar code Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 o
38. entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The data field must be numeric and contain exactly 5 9 or 11 digits d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BF n L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value in the range of the 4 inch vertical address block Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 161 Chapter 162 3 Bar Codes SC D d
39. 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included BFmL Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 179 Chapter 3 Bar Codes DARK SR SC D data field 180 b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with the maximum number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be less than L It is permitted to supply no data at all d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BF n L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters to use during Execute Form mode Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length
40. 0 through 9 Tilde Dollar sign Single quotes Percent sign 96 Exclamation point Dash Pound sign At sign Ampersand amp Left and right braces Prompt The prompt is the symbol e g a dollar sign period or greater than symbol used to indicate that the host computer is ready for data input In this manual the prompt is shown as a period Numeric Values In this manual a lowercase n in the command represents a numeric value If a command parameter includes a lowercase n it must be substituted with an appropriate numeric value If the lowercase n is part of an optional parameter and the option is not selected a value for n is not required Comments in Command Lines To aid in preparation or maintenance of a form or logo comments can be added to many command lines Comments must be preceded by a slash However do not use the comment feature on lines containing an SFCC i e CREATE NORMAL EXECUTE etc Throughout this manual comments are provided in parentheses beside most command lines for better understanding of IGP operation but should not be included in your IGP files Storing Data To send data to the IGP use a system command such as PRINT Entering data through the keyboard does not store data in memory Once stored in memory the data remains until deleted the IGP is reset with RESET command or until the printer is turned off IGP PGL files can be permanen
41. 2 5 To calculate and plot the optional modulo 10 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD I25GERMAN Designates German Interleaved 2 5 enter ITF14 DIR MAG Hn m I25GERMAN The mod 10 check digit is automatically included Designates ITF 14 enter ITF14 The mod 10 check digit is automatically included Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included 137 Cha
42. 28 42 5C 29 43 5D 2A 44 5E 2B 45 5F 2C 46 60 2 47 61 2 48 62 2 49 63 7 30 4 64 7 81 4B 65 32 4C 66 FNC 3 23 See NOTE 33 4D 67 FNC 2 22 See NOTE 34 4E 68 SHIFT 28 See NOTE 35 4F i 69 CODEC 27 SeeNOTE 36 50 6A FUNC4 24 SeeNOTE 37 51 6B CODEA 25 SeeNOTE 38 52 6C FNC 1 21 See NOTE 39 53 6D START B STOP O aes eS 0 T w x y z i 2 rogomnmmoourp dmg O Q N O Note Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out decimal 14 hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character which must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO control code can be changed to any decimal value from 0 through 255 using the printer s front panel See the Configuration Menus chapter in your User s Guide 114 Code 128A 128B and 128C Table 14 Code 128C Character Set 38 31 82 38 32 83 38 33 84 38 34 85 38 35 86 38 36 87 38 37 88 38 38 89 38 39 90 39 30 91 39 31 92 39 32 93 39 33 94 39 34 95 39 35 96 39 36 97 39 37 98 39 38 99 39 39 CODEB 26 See NOTE CODEA 25 See NOTE FNC 1 21 See NOTE STOP N A Note Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out decimal 14 hex OE The SO control v code identifies the
43. 40 239 Chapter 240 4 Form Design 7 30 38 8 29 36 9 28 35 10 27 34 52 54 11 24 33 48 54 12 22 31 45 54 13 19 30 41 54 14 16 29 38 53 15 13 17 19 29 36 51 16 11 17 20 29 33 48 17 9 17 21 44 18 7 17 22 42 19 6 17 22 39 20 4 17 23 36 21 1 17 24 34 22 1 17 25 34 23 1 17 26 34 24 1 17 27 60 25 1 17 28 60 26 1 17 29 60 27 1 17 30 60 28 1 17 31 59 29 1 17 19 59 30 1 17 19 35 31 1 4 33 36 32 1 5 33 39 33 1 6 33 58 34 1 7 33 58 35 1 58 36 1 58 37 1 58 38 1 57 39 4 24 40 7 23 41 8 23 42 9 23 43 11 24 44 12 25 45 14 27 46 15 30 47 17 32 48 18 33 49 22 34 50 25 35 51 26 36 52 28 37 53 30 37 54 32 37 55 33 37 56 35 36 END END Planning the Form Layout FESESSSSEE iunanEENESRERAPEEEENIRESEPERESRESESSESEENSENRSEENRSEENENSEENREuSSusr ERE EUER ER RET uuu UN TT Mibi rm Tm LETT AN TETT TT PREPARE 1 r IT ii EE LER 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 Figure 55 Sample Form Design 241 Chapter 4 Form Design a 65 5 100 105 Figure 56 Logo Design 242 Creating a Form and Adding Form Components Creating a Form and Adding Form Components 4 Create the form and start adding the form components from the layout grid Refer to Figu
44. 8 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 to 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 110 DARK SR SC D data field Code 128A 128B and 128C b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be less than L d The
45. Alphanumeric Data 62 Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data 63 Execute Form Mode 21 234 Execute Incremental Dynamic Data 65 Expanded Print 68 FIM 131 Font 69 Form Length 70 form name 24 format 23 German 1 2 5 137 Horizontal Duplication 54 Horizontal Lines 72 2 5 137 Ignore Sequence IGON IGOFF 71 Incremental Alphanumerics 34 Incremental Alphanumerics Dynamic Data 40 Incremental Alphanumerics Fixed Data 38 Incremental Barcode Fixed Data 211 Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data 66 Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data 66 inline commands 23 ITF 14 137 line printer emulation 74 Line Spacing 71 line terminator 24 Listen 74 Logo Call 74 Matrix 143 MSI 149 Normal Mode 16 17 78 Page Number 78 Paper 79 Paper Instruction data bit 8 79 parameters 24 PDF417 153 PostBar 164 POSTNET 161 Print File 80 printable character 24 Quiet 81 Reset 82 Reverse Print 82 Royal Mail 164 Scale 83 Select Format 84 semicolon 23 Setup 81 spaces 24 Special Function Control Character 23 Telepen 169 UPC A 187 UPC E 193 UPCSHIP 200 uppercase 23 UPS 11 204 Vertical Duplication 56 243 Vertical Lines 73 Comments in command line 25 Compressed Print 29 Compressed Print Command 45 Configuration Command 46 Corner Command 49 Corner Errors 265 CP DP Format 26 Create character sets 14 Create Command 51 Create Errors 268 Create Form Mode
46. E INV 45 48 0 0 E STOP END EXECUTE TEST NORMAL 32 Alphanumerics Rows E M epic E ROW 39 2 gt COLUMN 37 COLUMN 49 D oa COLUMN 48 I Ed ROW 45 ET ISIM COLUMN 60 PREC EEEEREE CALYAANI 4 ROW 54 5 CM IN T EFI HON SB Q COLUMN 58 COLUMN 26 Figure 4 Alphanumeric Example 33 Chapter 34 2 Command Codes Alphanumerics Incremental Fields Purpose The incremental fields feature updates alphanumeric and bar code data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically using just one set of data sent from the host computer Incremental alphanumeric data fields can be applied to fixed static data page 38 or dynamic data page 40 Mode CREATE for fixed data or EXECUTE for dynamic data Note Throughout the discussion of incremental fields the term increment or incremental means the field is automatically updated by a specified amount or increment The field can actually be increased decreased in specified increments decrements within the command Comments Incremental fields can increase or decrease repeat at specified intervals before updating and reset to the starting value after a specified number of increments A maximum of 65 535 fields can print Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data Incrementing is controlled with the STEPM
47. Form Count Parameter 59 65 Increment Reset Parameter 59 60 65 Increment decrement capability 14 Incremental Alphanumeric Data 27 Incremental Bar Code Fields 208 Incremental Barcode Dynamic Data 212 Incremental Barcode Fixed Data 211 Incremental Dynamic Barcodes 213 Incremental Fields Errors 274 Incremental Fields Example 225 Incrementing Alphanumeric Data 34 Inline Commands 23 Form Layout planning 239 Interleaved 2 5 135 Form Length 51 IRST Parameter 59 60 65 Form Length Command 70 ISET Command 256 Form Name 24 51 59 Italic Print 69 Format ITF 14 135 commands 23 L G Layout page 239 Line feed paper motion using 283 Line Printer Emulation Commands 74 Line Spacing 71 83 H Line Spacing Command 71 Listen Command 74 Logo 236 Create command 237 creating 236 define 237 239 features 14 Logo Call Command 74 German 2 5 135 Graphic scaling capabilities 14 HDUP Command 54 Horizontal Duplication Command 54 Horizontal Line Errors 262 Horizontal Lines Command 72 HORZ Command 72 2 5 Logo Errors 267 command format 137 Logos deleting 53 example 140 83 structure 135 297 Matrix 141 commands 143 example 146 structure 141 Memory 25 Miscellaneous Errors 270 Mode Create Logo 236 Execute Form 234 Modes Create Logo 76 Execute Form 58 Normal 78 Modes of Operation Create Form 18 Create Logo 18 Execute Form 20 introduction 15 Normal 16 MS
48. IGP in the Create Logo Mode where logos can be 76 defined using the appropriate dot placements Delete Form DELETE Deletes a selected form name from the directory and IGP 52 FORM memory Directory DIRECTORY Provides a list of all defined forms and logos logo assignments 53 to forms and memory usage and availability Emulation Switch EMULATION Switch emulation from IGP PGL to IGP VGL if VGL is present 57 Execute EXECUTE Executes a previously created form 58 Expanded Print EXPAND Expands fonts vertically and horizontally 68 Font FONT Selects a specific typeface bold slant italic factor and 69 symbol set Ignore Sequence IGON Enables the IGP to ignore all characters after the Ignore 71 On Off IGOFF Sequence On command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent See note on page 20 Line Spacing LPI Defines the lines per inch printing format 71 Vertical Listen LISTEN Removes IGP from the quiet state and enables IGP operation 74 Multinational ISET Use a character set Chap 5 Character Set USET Create a custom user defined character set Normal Mode NORMAL Places the IGP in the Normal Mode where it does not change 78 the data stream but awaits the SFCC followed by an IGP command Paper Instruction EN PI Enables or disables use of the PI line with a parallel interface 80 Enable Disable DIS PI Paper Instruction PION Enables or disables Data Bit 8 as the paper instruction signal in 79 On Off for Data Bit8 PIOFF a se
49. Mode Normal Mode commands print data in a line printer format until a Special Function Control Code SFCC is detected Commands accessible in the Normal Mode are summarized in Table 1 and fully described on the referenced page Some Normal Mode commands can also be used in other modes Compressed Print Expand Ignore Select Format and Vertical Line Spacing which are Normal Mode commands can also be used in the Execute Form Mode the Multinational Character Set command can be used in the Normal or Create Modes Carriage Return Form Feed Line Feed EVFU commands and Paper Slew commands also operate in the Normal Mode Note All IGP commands must be entered in UPPERCASE and each command line must be followed immediately by a line k feed or carriage return with line feed terminator or a paper motion command Quiet Mode In this mode the host processes all data as ASCII characters without any IGP interpretation the IGP is disabled and all IGP commands are ignored The IGP looks only for the cc LISTEN command Modes of Operation Table 1 Normal Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Description Page Compressed Print DENSITY Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch cpi 45 Configuration CONFIG Reconfigures IGP PGL parameters 46 Create CREATE Places the IGP in the Create Form Mode where all the Create 51 Form Mode commands are available to design form elements Create Logo LOGO Places the
50. N n N SI O O o O DLE P 0 0 P P p P DC1 Q 1 1 Q Q q Q DC2 R 2 2 R R r R DC3 s 3 3 S S S 5 DC4 T 4 4 T T t 4T NAK U 5 5 U U U SYN V 6 6 V V V ETB w 7 7 W W w W CAN X 8 8 X X x X EM Y 9 9 Y Y y Y SUB Z 2 2 2 2 Z ESC A FS B lt G L GS H R RS D gt ax 5 US J e 960 DEL X Y Z Note Character pairs M N and P through Y are reserved for u future control character pairs Code 39 Example Figure 9 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 39 bar code generated by the following program BARCODE C3 SA PDF STO BARCODE C3 9 VSCAN H14 DARK 27 58 SA PDF STOE D E F ATE C39 9 D DARK 40 15 PLE C3 9 PLE C3 9 EXE iCUT E C39 1 SC 15 HHE SAMPLE 63 9 Code 39 Enter Create Form mode Bar Code Command Dark Code 39 at SR 40 SC 15 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code Command ew Bar Code Command Vert Dark Code 39 H 1 4 at SR 27 SC 58 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code Command Terminates Create Form mode Execute the form form count of 1 SR 27 SC 58 ammm a si 1275252 22 rs a ECEVEE
51. P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Table 16 Telepen Character Set ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen ASCII Telepen NUL U SP Space V W SOH A A A A a A STX B ii B B b IC C C G EOT D D D d D ENQ E E E E e E ACK F amp F F F f F BEL G IG G G g G BS H H H H h H HT 9 l i I LF J J J J j J VT K K K K k K FF L y L L L l L CR M M M m M SO N n N SI O O O o O DLE P 0 0 P P p P DC1 Q 1 1 Q Q q Q DC2 R 2 2 R R r R DC3 s 3 3 S S S 5 DC4 T 4 4 T T t T NAK U 5 5 U U U SYN V 6 6 V V V ETB W 7 7 W W w W CAN X 8 8 X X x X EM Y 9 9 Y Y y Y SUB Z IZ Z Z 2 Z ESC 96A FS lt L GS H R RS D gt A 6 05 J __ DEL X Y Z NOTE Character pairs M N and P through Y are reserved for future control character pairs 171 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Telepen Example Figure 36 illustrates a vertical Telepen bar code generated by the following program CREATE TELEPEN Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code Command TELEPEN V
52. Plus one digit for length indication Plus one digit for decimal point indication Data Value Representation a alphabetic characters an alpha numeric characters an 3 up to 3 alpha numeric characters n numeric characters n3 3 numeric characters fixed length n 3 up to 3 numeric characters UCC EAN 128 Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code UCC EAN 128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C and a stop code common to both An automatic mode switching feature is used to generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters Data Field UCC EAN 128 bar codes require a special character called Function 1 FNC1 to immediately follow the start code IGP automatically supplies this character so it must not be included in the data field by the user A character is made up of three bars and three spaces each varying in width from 1 to 4 modules for a total of eleven modules The number of modules making up the bars is even The stop code has four bars and is 18 modules wide The character set for UCC
53. Type and Function 0 9 A Z Alpha characters incremented by amount in STEPMASK field 0 9 0 9 Numeric characters incremented by amount in STEPMASK field Space Same character type as character in the next right adjacent linked increment position Character type will be numeric if in least significant position 0 9 4 9 Error Not 0 9 or L Any Non incrementing alphanumeric character Any Linked non incrementing alphanumeric character The examples on the following pages illustrate incremental alphanumeric data fields All cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset count parameter value of 0 The three vertical dots illustrate the natural progression for each column and unit of data based on the incremental count and its impact on linked and unlinked data fields 35 Chapter 2 Command Codes Value Description STARTDATA ABC123 Linked subfields ABC and 123 STEPMASK 000001 RPT 1 0 Printed Results ABC123 ABC124 ABC999 ABD000 222999 AAA000 Value Description STARTDATA 1ABC123 Two separate but linked numeric STEPMASK 0111001 subfields 1 and 123 while fixed data I ABC is nonincrementing Printed Results 1ABC123 RPT 1 1ABC124 s xz RPT 0 1ABC999 2 000 Value Description STARTDATA ABC123 Two separate unlinked subfields STEPMASK 001 1 ABC and 3 while fixed da
54. UCC 128 Command Format BARCODE UCC 128 DIR MAG Hr m BFr5L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE UCC 128 DIR MAG Hn m Designates bar code type Code UCC EAN 128 enter UCC 128 Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify the bar code symbol by increasing the width of the bars and spaces The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 8 You can also use XR as defined on page 89 You must specify eight digits for variable ratio They stand for the widths of alternating bars and spaces from the narrowest to the widest Note that a valid UCC EAN 128 bar code can be no larger than 165 mm 6 5 inches wide Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current scale Note If
55. and data as described in the Bar Codes chapter Boxes BOX Defines size location and thickness of boxes 43 Corners CORNER Defines vertical and horizontal length location and thickness 49 of a set of four corners Duplication HDUP Defines the number of horizontal duplications of an element 54 Horizontal and the spacing between duplications End END Terminates the Create Form Mode 57 Form Length LFORM Specifies the form length by total number of lines at 6 or 8 Ipi 70 Ignore Sequence IGON Enables the IGP to ignore all characters after the Ignore 71 On Off IGOFF Sequence On command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent See Note on page 20 Lines Horizontal HORZ Defines the location size and thickness of horizontal lines 72 Lines Vertical VERT Defines the location size and thickness of vertical lines 73 Logo Call LOGO Specifies the location of a previously defined logo 74 Multinational ISET Selects one of the multinational or international character sets Chap 5 Character Set Page Number PAGE Defines the location for automatically incremented page 78 numbers Reverse Print REVERSE Defines the location for white on black printing and selects the 82 background shade Scale SCALE Defines the vertical spacing and horizontal pitch for data 83 positioning in character or dot columns and rows Select Format SFON Ignores all host generated paper movement commands See 84 On Off SFOFF note on page 20
56. and shading features for a customized appearance to forms reports and labels Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing a dark background around white characters Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields which include automatic increment or decrement functions Scaling Capability permits graphic elements such as corners or boxes to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets each 96 characters in length This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets these also having 96 characters These are also stored in memory How the IGP Operates IGP is an emulation that allows printing of sophisticated graphics and bar codes The printer performs commands based on the current mode These modes are discussed in more detail beginning on page 15 When the printer is receiving or printing text it is in Normal Mode Any time the printer is on and is not processing IGP commands it is in Normal Mode Modes of Operation When a Create Form command is issued the printer moves from the Normal Mode to the Create Form Mode When in the Create Fo
57. another form When this occurs the IGP automatically reverts to the Normal mode To create space in the IGP memory delete forms that are no longer required Execute Errors 70 71 72 73 EXECUTE form count parameter FC error This error occurs when the parameter specifying the number of blank forms to print was entered incorrectly When this error occurs the IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode Form count can be from 1 through 65 535 EXECUTE DELETE form not found in the directory An attempt was made to execute or delete a form which does not exist in the forms directory When this error occurs the IGP reverts to the Normal mode EXECUTE EVFU load error This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode while programming the EVFU If more channels than lines per physical page are specified during a load sequence this error is generated and the IGP reverts to the Normal mode EXECUTE EVFU terminator invalid This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode The EVFU LOAD is missing an END LOAD code If the line terminator cannot be deciphered an error is generated and the IGP reverts to the Normal mode 269 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 74 Missing delimiter must be a single quotation mark When issuing an SFCC change command the new SFCC character must be contained within two single quotation marks If the new SFCC character is being identified by the ASCII value no qu
58. begin outside the form boundaries error number 31 and the starting ending row parameters to be out of order error number 39 CORNER 3 300 13 57 64 5 7 ERROR 35 CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds ERROR 31 CORNER starting row SR out of bounds ERROR 39 CORNER starting row SR ending row ER STOP END 249 Chapter 4 Solving Program Errors 250 5 Multinational Character Sets Introduction The Multinational Character Set accesses one of many international character sets Each character set is 96 characters long and can be accessed by configuration selection or IGP command Individual characters in the font can be accessed with the use of data bit 8 Supported Character Sets The Multinational Character Set provides the IGP PGL with space for 32 character sets 96 characters each The character sets and their corresponding set values are listed in Table 21 Table 21 Multinational Character Sets and Set Values Character Set Value Character Set Value US ASCII 0 Dutch 7 German 1 French 8 Swedish 2 Spanish 9 Danish 3 Italian 10 Norwegian 4 Turkish 11 Finnish 5 Reserved 12 23 English 6 User Defined Sets 24 31 Standard PGL sets 0 through 11 are resident character sets Sets 12 through 23 are reserved spaces in font memory for future resident character sets If a value from 12 through 23 is called when attempting to choose a character set the character font will default to
59. code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 187 Chapter 188 3 Bar Codes DARK SR SC D data field b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 11 digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the qata field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot colu
60. command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 205 Chapter 206 3 Bar Codes SC D data field PDF LOC FONT STOP Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the data for the bar code This bar code is restricted to 10 data characters The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9 Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for
61. data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Codabar Command Format BARCODE CODABAR CD DIR MAG Hn m BF n L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE CODABAR CD Designates bar code type Codabar enter CODABAR To calculate and plot the optional modulo 43 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Hn m Codabar Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD defined on page 89 Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default va
62. discussion of incremental fields the term increment or incremental means the field is automatically updated by a specified amount or increment You can actually increment the field by a positive amount added or a negative amount subtracted as specified within the command You can use bar code incremental fields with fixed static data input as part of the Create Form mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form mode New formats and parameters are required in the bar code commands for static and dynamic incremental fields In addition the Execute Form command requires a new format and parameters when you use incremental fields with dynamic data You can increment or decrement incremental fields repeat at specified intervals before updating and reset to the starting value after a specified number of increments Incrementing Bar Code Data The IGP internally counts incremental static fixed bar code data fields A maximum of 255 incremental fixed bar code data fields are allowed per form Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA command parameters as described in Table 20 The parameters are part of the bar code command or part of the Execute command when using the Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data command The STEPMASK parameter performs three functions 1 It defines the increment amount step 2 It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field STARTDATA and 3 I
63. entered an error message results Code 128A 128B and 128C Table 12 Code 128A Character Set Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex NUL 00 SUB 1A 34 4E SOH 01 ESC 1B 35 4F STX 02 FS 1C 36 50 ETX 03 GS 1D 37 51 EOT 04 RS 1E 38 52 ENQ 05 US 1F 39 53 ACK 06 20 3A 54 BEL 07 21 3B 55 BS 08 22 3C 56 HT 09 23 3D 57 LF 0A 24 3E 58 VT 0B 25 3F 59 FF 0C 26 40 CR 0D 27 41 5B SO 28 42 5 5 29 43 5D DLE 10 2A 44 5E 11 2B 45 5F 12 2G 46 FNC 3 See NOTE 13 4 2D 47 FNC 2 See NOTE 14 2 48 SHIFT See NOTE 15 2F 49 CODE C See NOTE 16 30 4A FUNC 4 See NOTE 17 31 4B CODE B See NOTE 18 32 4C FNC 1 See NOTE 19 33 4D START STOP Aoc N lt cau mq so z gt A B D E F G H TAS Note Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out decimal 14 hex OE The SO control v code identifies the next character as the control function character which must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO control code can be changed to any decimal value from 0 through 255 using the printer s front panel See the Configuration Menus chapter in your User s Guide 113 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 13 Code 128B Character Set SP 20 3A T 54 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 21 3B 22 3C 23 3D 24 3E 25 3F 26 40 27 41
64. forget to terminate each command line with a line feed or carriage return with line feed or a paper motion command Enter all commands in uppercase Make sure the printer power is on and the printer is ONLINE Creating a Box and Corners 1 On your host computer open create a file for your practice form For example Enter Format PRACTC FRM system format 2 Enter the Create Form mode and specify a form name This is the first input for every new form Use the Create command and PRACTICE as the form name Enter Format CREATE PRACTICE CREATE formname FL Creating a Box and Corners 3 The IGP is now ready for Create Form mode commands Design a box with a line thickness LT of 2 dots a top left corner at starting row SH 35 starting column SC 16 and a bottom right corner at ending row ER 53 ending column EC 61 The STOP command must be entered to inform the IGP that the Box command is complete Enter Format BOX BOX 2 35 16 53 61 LT SR SC ER EC STOP STOP 4 Use the Corner command to set the box off with corners having a line thickness LT of 3 dots a top left corner at row 5 30 column SC 13 a bottom right corner at row 57 column 64 a vertical length VL 5 character spaces long and a horizontal length HL 7 character spaces long The STOP command must be entered to stop the Corner command and END must be entered to terminate the Create Form mode to prepare for
65. form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 89 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The barcode data The UPCSHIP barcode requires exactly 13 characters of data The available characters are 0 through 9 hex 30 through hex 39 The modulo 10 check digit is automatically included in the barcode Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data is not printed Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch 201 Chapter 3 Bar Codes FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi STOP Ends the Bar Code com
66. from the tilde to the caret SFCC 94 or SFCC 51 m P 3 Overview Bar Codes A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters Bar codes are produced by entering bar code commands in the Create Form mode The IGP bar codes are listed in Table 7 with detailed bar code information provided on the referenced pages All parameters must be separated by a semicolon unless noted otherwise Throughout this chapter actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they must be entered while all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters but do not enter these spaces in your command 87 Chapter 88 Overview Table 7 Available Bar Codes Bar Code Mnemonic LR Code Set P Codabar CODABAR Variable Alphanumeric 91 Code 39 C3 9 Variable Alphanumeric 96 Code 93 CODE93 Variable Alphanumeric 102 Code 128 C128A Variable Alphanumeric and 108 A Band C C128B Control Codes C128C EAN8 8 7 digits Numeric 118 13 13 12 digits Numeric 123 FIM FIM n a A B CorD 129 German 1 2 5 I25GERMAN 11 or 13 digits Numeric 135 Interleaved 2 5 1 2 5 Variable Numeric 135 ITF 14 ITF14 13 digits Numeric 135 Matrix MATRIX Variable Numeric 141 MSI MSI 13 or 14 digits Numeric 147 PDF417 PDF417 Variable Alphanumeric and 153 Control Codes Po
67. length L parameter Refer to Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data on page 65 for more information 213 Chapter 3 Incremental Bar Code Fields Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields Fixed and dynamic incremental bar code data fields are duplicated horizontally and vertically in the same way that incremental alphanumeric fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated Refer to page 40 for more information on duplicating incremental data CREATE TEST 288 VDUP 3 6 BARCODE C3 9 H7 IBF1 6 D 6 5 PDF STOP VDUP OFF END EXECUTE TEST IBF1 000001 123459 NORMAL HOW HHHO 23459 i23460 ATM 123461 214 4 Form Examples and Exercises Form Examples IMPORTANT The following example demonstrates how to use Create commands in the Create Form mode using the CP DP format The printed output for this program is shown in Figure 46 on page 217 The box surrounding the form represents the paper size Note If comment lines are used on command lines they must be preceded by a slash Do not use comments lines Y containing an SFCC NORMAL CREATE EXECUTE etc Comments in parentheses in this section are provided for better understanding of IGP operation but should not be included in your IGP files The examples in this chapter assume the Select Format command is already enabled SFON When enable
68. line Add three horizontal lines each with a thickness LT of 1 at rows R 40 45 and 49 and each ranging from column SC 16 to column EC 61 Enter Format HORZ HORZ 1 40 16 61 LT R SC EC 1 45 16 61 1 49 16 61 STOP STOP Add two vertical lines each with a thickness LT of 1 both in column C 49 one ranging from row SH 40 to row ER 45 and the other ranging from row SH 49 to row ER 53 Enter Format VERT VERT 1 49 40 45 LT C SR ER 1 49 49 53 STOP STOP Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text The last two commands have added to the form definition PRACTICE now looks like Figure 51 E _ COLUMN 49 lt ROW 40 lt ROW 45 lt ROW 49 is Figure 51 Box Corner Example with Horizontal and Vertical Lines Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text 10 Use the Create Form mode Alpha command to add some fixed alphanumeric text to the form Specify some compressed print the starting row SH and starting column SC for each alphanumeric string any vertically VE or horizontally HE expanded strings and the alphanumeric string itself which must be within the printable character quotation marks or asterisks for example Substitute your own name address etc in the appropriate areas If you do not want to include some of the data on your form do not enter the line Enter Format ALPHA ALPHA 31 22 0 0 ACME MOTOR SR SC VE H
69. memory required for each logo The maximum logo size allowed is 252 rows high 3 5 inches and 240 columns wide 4 inches Values exceeding either of these dimensions will produce an error To maximize memory space do not define the vertical and horizontal length of the logo grid larger than is required to capture the design The printer produces a grid with 72 dots per inch vertically and 60 dots per inch horizontally Consequently a logo must be designed using this scale The Logo Call command page 74 in the Create Form mode brings the predefined logo into a form The starting row and column parameters refer to the upper left corner of the logo grid Once created the logo is ready to be used in any form and will print at the size shown EHOLD 36 40 14 2 14 17 23 1551512 19 22 38 39 16 1 12 20 23 37 40 17 1 11 20 23 37 40 18 1 11 20 23 36 40 19 1 11 20 23 36 40 20 1 11 20 23 35 40 21 1 12 20 24 35 40 22 1 12 19 24 34 39 4 17 25 33 39 2371 VL 36 24 1 28 31 39 HL 40 2551 39 26 2 38 217 2 38 28 2 37 29723537 30 3 36 31 3 36 32 4 35 33 5 34 34 6 33 3571 32 36 9 30 END 77 Chapter 78 2 Command Codes Normal Mode Purpose Mode Format Places the IGP in the Normal mode of operation where the data stream is not changed but monitored for a Special Function Control Code followed by an IGP command NORMAL EXECUTE NORMAL cc The Special
70. modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol immediately in front of the stop code in the same manner as the C128 bar code The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm The modulo 103 check digit is not displayed in the readable data field Modulo 10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC 18 and SCC 14 Al 00 called the Serial Shipping Container Code or SSCC 18 takes eighteen additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is modulo 10 check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes Counting the two zeros of the application identifier the modulo 10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the data field AI 01 called the Shipping Container Code or SCC 14 takes fourteen additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a modulo 10 check digit on the preceding thirteen data bytes Counting the zero and the one of the application identifier the modulo 10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the data field The modulo 10 data field check digit for both SSCC 18 and SCC 14 is printed in the bar code as the second half of the last number pair using subset C It is displayed in the human readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC 18 or the sixteenth byte for SCC 14 IGP PGL automatically calculates the modulo 10 check digit for SSCC 18 if only 17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00 UCC EAN 128 Code
71. modulo 11 or both check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning MSI MSI Command Format BARCODE MSI n DIR MAG Hn m BF L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE MSI Designates bar code type MSI enter MSI n Designates the type of check digit combinations for the bar code Replace n with one of the following codes to specify the check digit A single digit modulo 10 followed by a second modulo 10 digit B single digit modulo 11 followed by a single modulo 10 digit C single digit modulo 10 D single digit modulo 1 1 DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustmen
72. of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command or use the CP DP format Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command or use the CP DP format The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used on both ends of the data field It will not print with the data The bar code data The data field for UCC EAN 128 consists of an application identifier Al of two to four numbers followed by data of appropriate length variable or fixed and type numeric or alphanumeric See Table 17 for a list of application identifiers and their associated data fields The FNC1 character is required as the first character after the start code for UCC EAN 128 bar codes and IGP will always generate it automatically It will appear in the bar code but not in the human readable field Do not supply FNC1 in the data field PDF LOC FONT STOP UCC EAN 128 The start code and subset switching is done automatically by IGP based on the data field contents so that the bar code length is minimized Subset C encodes each pair of numbers as a single bar code character providing a higher character density If
73. or else an incorrect number of ratios was specified 101 BARCODE PDF not allowed or error LOC A or B FONT N O X S P Q R TorV Either the alternate font was selected for a bar code or an invalid parameter was used Acceptable parameters must be N for the normal font for the OCR A optional font X for the OCR B optional font or 5 to suppress printing of the data field P for 12 cpi Q for 13 cpi R for 15 cpi T for 17 cpi V for 20 cpi 102 Dynamic BARCODE symbol exceeds the form length The dynamic bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print below the limits of the form This error occurs on the data field line of the bar code 103 Dynamic BARCODE symbol exceeds the form width The bar code command with a dynamic data field exceeds the limits of the current form width 272 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Reverse Print Errors Dynamic BARCODE data field BFn not previously defined Dynamic data field designated in the Execute Form mode was not defined in the Create Form mode Dynamic ALPHA BARCODE field number AFn BFn error must be 1 512 Dynamic alpha field number AF n or bar code field number BF must range from 1 through 512 Not defined Dynamic ALPHA data field AFn not previously defined The dynamic alpha field number called for was not previously defined in the Create Form mode Not defined Dynamic ALPHA BARCODE field longer than previously defined The BARCOD
74. printing Enter Format CORNER CORNER 3 30 13 57 64 5 7 LT SR SC ER EC VL HL STOP STOP END END 5 Now use the Execute command and form name to prepare for printing Enter a blank line using a terminator and then the Normal command to instruct the IGP to return to the Normal mode after executing the form Enter Format EXECUTE PRACTICE cc EXECUTE formname PAGEn FC NORMAL cc NORMAL 6 To print the form exit the file if necessary for your system and use the system print command to print the file For example after exiting the file and your system prompt returns Enter Format PRINT PRACTC FRM System Format The form should look like the one shown in Figure 50 When it was printed the form program was stored in the IGP memory If errors are detected in the program error messages are printed and only the error free portions of the program are stored in the IGP memory Refer to Solving Program Errors on page 248 229 Chapter 230 4 Form Exercise SC 13 SR30 Fa SR 35 M 4 ER53 EC 61 lt ER 57 EC 64 Figure 50 Box and Corner Example Adding Horizontal and Vertical Lines 7 Now return to the file When the file reopens the existing program the contents of the file is displayed Use your system commands to reopen the file For example Enter Format PRACTC FRM System Format All Create Form mode commands must be entered into the program before the End command
75. provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code data field Enter a plus sign and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard pattern DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented SCB This option shortens the length of the center guard bars which are normally full length MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for for variable ratio Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 4 through 9 9 inches The default value is 1 3 inches The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale BFn Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar
76. ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used Refer to the data field description for available characters DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information SR Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value 1 8 inch from the top edge of the mail piece Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 SC Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 D The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data data field A single character data field to designate one of four available FIM patterns A B C or D Based on your appli
77. show which element is out of bounds 124 125 Not defined 126 LFORMx form length parameter n error The number of lines exceeds 66 for 6 or 88 for 8 lines when using the LFORMx command 127 Not defined 128 FORM LOGO name is not a legal file name The file name exceeds the fifteen character limitation or an invalid character was used in the file name Refer to IGP Command Standards in the Commands chapter 129 Not defined Incremental Fields Errors 130 Not defined 131 Incremental STEPMASK parameter error A semicolon is missing after the STEPMASK data 132 Incremental REPEAT RESET parameter error An illegal RPT or RST parameter value was found in the incremental command The value must range from 1 through 65 535 133 Incremental STEPMASK STARTDATA length error The dynamic stepmask exceeded created field length or start data exceeded stepmask 134 Incremental EXECUTE command error An illegal IRST or ICNT parameter value was found in the Execute command The value must range from 1 through 65 535 135 Not defined 136 Incremental STEPMASK STARTDATA mismatched The STARTDATA value must be A Z or 0 9 when the STEPMASK value is a value from 0 9 Multinational Character Set Errors 150 ISET character selection parameter n error An ISET character set selection parameter value was expected Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an alpha character See Chapter 5 151 USET
78. special function The special function call was unrecognizable The IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode 82 Numeric value expected in input parameter Characters other than numeric digits 0 9 are encountered where digits are expected 83 Decimal input error in input parameter The parameter expected was a decimal number Either the number was not there or it was too large greater than 65 535 This error can also be caused by entering an alpha character instead of a numeric character 270 84 85 86 87 88 89 Bar Code Errors Missing or wrong delimiter must be a semicolon The delimiter is either wrong or missing The delimiter expected is a semicolon Missing or wrong delimiter must be a colon The delimiter is either wrong or missing The delimiter expected is a colon DENSITY param error 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 or 20 The parameters of the Density command are improperly specified The densities currently implemented are 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 and 20 characters per inch The command is ignored and processing continues LPI parameters error must be 6 8 9 10 The parameters of the command are improperly specified The only parameters implemented 6 8 9 and 10 The command is ignored and processing continues Bar code type is not supported The specified bar code type is either misspelled or not supported EXPAND parameters out of bounds or format error
79. the first four data digits are numbers the bar code starts in subset C otherwise it starts in subset B The subset will switch from B to C at any point in the data field if the next four characters are numbers and will switch from C to B if the next two characters are not numbers or only one character remains The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 13 except the system SFCC and the character used as a delimiter Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If this parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code The height of the bar code body is reduced to compensate for the human readable field and the guard bands Optional parameter to identify the font of the printable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the bar code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not encountered an error message results 181 Chapter 3 Bar Codes
80. the value is in printer dots Defines the vertical expansion factor to enlarge characters vertically Enter a value between 0 and 113 Zero specifies the standard font no expansion A VE value must be entered Elongated E and compressed Cn characters cannot be used with a vertical expansion other than Zero Defines the horizontal expansion factor to enlarge characters horizontally Enter a value between 0 and 113 Zero specifies the standard font no expansion An HE value must be entered Elongated E and compressed characters cannot be used with a horizontal expansion other than zero The printable character quotation marks for example identifying the start and finish of the alphanumeric string Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the alphanumeric string itself You must use the same character at both ends of the alphanumeric string but it will not print with the data The group of ASCII characters the alphanumeric string to print Enter any of the standard ASCII printable characters except the character used to delimit the string in the D parameter The data appears as prepositioned information on the form beginning at the location specified by SH and SC This is the fixed or static alphanumeric data once defined on the form it is changed only by redefining the form using the Alphanumeric command Stop indicates the end of the Alphanumeric com
81. through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 SR Defines the starting row of the vertical line Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 ER Defines the ending row of the vertical line Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 STOP Stop indicates the end of the VERT command enter STOP If not entered the IGP expects another set of Vertical Line command parameters Example The following program specifies 4 vertical lines To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page 73 Chapter 74 2 Command Codes VERT 2 36 53 61 2 50 53 61 2760753761 2 10 53 61 STOP COLUMN 36 COLUMN 50 ROW53 gt ROW61 gt Listen Purpose Disables the IGP from the quiet state and enables the IGP for standard operation The Quiet command is explained on page 81 Mode NORMAL Format cc LISTEN cc The Special Function Control Code LISTEN The Listen command enter LISTEN Not
82. until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP memory delete forms with corner elements that are no longer required CORNER starting column SC ending column EC The left starting column parameter of the corner command is greater than or equal to the right ending column parameter CORNER starting row SR ending row ER The upper starting row parameter of the corner command is greater than or equal to the lower ending row parameter 265 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Alpha Errors 40 ALPHA leading and trailing delimiters mismatched The leading delimiter printable character of the actual text string was not matched with an ending delimiter before the line terminator was found 41 ALPHA starting row SR out of bounds The starting row parameter in the Alpha command will cause the text string to print either above or below the limits of the form Note Expanded print text strings expand up from the specified row This could cause an attempt to print the text string above the top of the form and generate the error message 42 ALPHA starting column SC out of bounds The starting column parameter in the Alpha command is either extending the alpha string beyond the left margin of the form or the starting column parameter plus the actual length of the text is extending the string beyond the right margin of the page 43 ALPHA string length gt 255 char
83. 0 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 or 20 The optional compression parameter Cn which defines the horizontal pitch of the text was specified incorrectly The pitches available are 10 10A 10B 12 13 15 17 and 20 Logo Errors 50 51 52 53 54 55 LOGO horizontal width HL 240 or dot col HL a The horizontal width of the logo is equal to zero or greater than 240 The IGP automatically reverts to Normal mode when this occurs b A dot position specified in the logo program exceeds the specified horizontal width of the logo When this occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally LOGO vertical length VL gt 252 or dot row n gt VL a The vertical length of the logo is equal to zero or greater than 252 The IGP automatically reverts to Normal mode when this occurs b A dot row specified in the logo program exceeds the specified vertical length of the logo When this occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally LOGO hyphen syntax error in input parameters The beginning or ending dots are out of order or a parameter is missing The buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally Insufficient memory to create the LOGO No more room exists in IGP memory to construct a logo for the size specified When this occurs the IGP reverts to Nor
84. 0 0 P N STOP HDUP OFF END EXECUTE SAMPLE 1 NORMAL 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD IRVINE CA 92714 ACME INC 17500 CARTHRIGHT RD L IRVINE CA 92714 m L 5 0 Example Dynamic Data oos m ACME INC 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD L IRVINE C 92714 s i ACME INC 17500 CARTHRIGHT RD CA 92714 F Figure 47 Sample Form 219 Chapter 4 Form Examples Bar Code Fields Identify the location of the data fields for each of the six bar codes one location at each S O S N and P N field on the form The type of bar code and the human readable data information is also specified within the bar code commands Refer to the Bar Codes chapter for detailed bar code information Each bar code must be designated separately The bar code commands are part of the Create Form mode therefore they must be entered in the Create Form mode before the END command However because each dynamic field is assigned a unique number the commands should not be duplicated Reopen the file and input the following commands before the END command line but after the HDUP OFF command Note The IGP will horizontally or vertically duplicate dynamic bar code or alphanumeric data fields if required This will also duplicate the n parameter identifying the dynamic d
85. 10 cpi OCR B Comments Print density formats of 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 cpi are available Standard print density is 10 cpi After a Density command is entered all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified density until another Density command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered The Density command also permits the standard printer editing function carriage return editing After the Density command is entered data in the print buffer can be edited as described in your printer User s Guide Example The following command selects 15 cpi printing format until another Density command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered DENSITY 15 45 Chapter 46 2 Command Codes Configuration Purpose Mode Places the IGP PGL in the Configuration mode where changes to any or all of the IGP PGL configuration parameters via software control can be made instead of from the printer control panel NORMAL Note 1 A separate line is required for the CONFIG command the parameters and values and the END command Format cc CONFIG parameter value END cc The SFCC CONFIG The Configuration command enter CONFIG parameter value The parameter for which a configuration change is desired and the value associated with that parameter The available parameters and the values associated with these parameters are listed in Table 6 END Terminates the CONFIG command ente
86. 11 X3 50 0 1 8 4 3 2 1 X4 66 7 1 4 4 3 2 1 Code 128C X1 16 7 10 9 4 3 2 1 UCC EAN 128 X1 5 25 0 8 2 4 3 2 1 X2 33 0 5 4 4 3 2 1 X3 50 0 3 6 4 3 2 1 X4 66 7 2 7 4 3 2 1 EAN 8 and 13 default 16 7 1 28 MAG 4 3 2 1 Interleaved 2 5 X1 16 7 6 7 3 1 German l 2 5 X1A 20 8 5 7 2 6 1 ITF 14 X1B 16 7 8 5 2 1 Matrix X2 37 5 3 5 2 3 1 UPCSHIP X2A 33 2 4 3 2 1 X3 54 2 2 8 2 54 X4 70 8 1 8 2 41 MSI A X1 16 7 6 1 3 1 MSI B X2 25 1 4 1 2 54 MSI C X3 33 4 3 0 2 34 MSI D X4 41 7 2 4 2 3 1 UPC A and E default 16 7 1 28 MAG 4 3 2 1 PostBar and Royal X1 n a n a n a Mail X1A POSTNET Per U S Postal Service Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation USPS Certified 90 Codabar Bar Codes The rest of this chapter describes each of the bar codes available with the IGP PGL emulation Codabar The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 7 and described on the following pages 53 I QUIETI IQUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE e r 1 I I I I I I I I I OPTIONAL I i CHECK I DIGIT CCW i CW I I I I I I I I I i OPTIONAL i READABLE i i DATA i i FIELD i I I I I I I OPTIONAL I CHECK I DIGIT UPPER I LOWER LOWER I i UPPER GUARD 91 GUARD GUARD I GUARD BAND i BAND BAND BAND QUIET 1 QUIET ZONE ZONE HEIGHT HEIGHT gt OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 1 I UPPER GUARD BAND I I I Q
87. 18 Create Form Mode Commands 19 Create Logo Mode 18 76 D Dark Printing 28 Data alphanumeric 22 27 dynamic 22 fixed 22 incremental 22 27 overlay 22 placement 22 prepositioned 22 rotated 14 storing 25 Data Bit 8 multinational character sets 253 paper instruction command 79 Data Field updating 22 Debug Parameter 51 Debugging Program Errors 248 Debugging Programs 261 Deleting example 248 forms 52 logos 53 Density 29 83 Density Command 45 Designing Forms 239 Directory Command 53 247 Disable IGP quiet command 81 DISK Parameter 25 DIS PI 80 Double strike Printing DARK 28 Duplicating Incremental Bar Codes 214 295 Dynamic Alphanumeric Data 27 29 234 E EAN 13 123 command format 125 example 128 structure 123 EAN 8 118 command format 120 example 122 structure 118 Electronic Vertical Format Unit format 285 Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU 61 Elongated Characters 29 Emulation Switching Command 57 Enable IGP listen command 74 Enable Disable PI 80 End Command 57 End Load Code 286 EN PI 80 Error Codes purpose 261 Errors 262 alphanumerics 266 bar code 271 box 264 corners 265 create 268 execute 269 horizontal line 262 incremental fields 274 logo 267 miscellaneous 270 multinational character set 274 reverse print 273 solving program 248 vertical lines 263 EVFU 61 285 channel assignment 286 clearing memory 288 data 60 examp
88. 234567 N 0 st N r4 O C NPS gt BK gt OU gt gt G moduuuLmor en nv arzzo Ac Fehr se Be vnk OANMANOKDMDADATCMNOCAWL QTL 0 b 3 gt Z X gt N DO Or gt gt gt 0 9 lt OCMNOOWLODHOYIETEZO CANMTNONRDDs e VH AO dk 306007 Unk eb on N 0 O FN O O lt m O Q Li L OCR B Set OCR A Set UD1 PE 3H 5b 01234567 QOL nr D gt Z x gt N 0 0 OF OSCar E c gt Z gt x gt NN lt cQ CO O uj LL 9 Z iq SZ Z Z O CO N SO COM lt V I A C 2 RARD Yak en O lt C O OO lt m O gt Z X s U O 0 OC E C O 5 0 00 gt gt gt rN q XZ FA lt 8 lt Q U m LI L D T H gt F X SS C a ru rm T Ln or OTe sr V H A lt S E UN DW cd ru rn tn Or cg 07 lt mQ 260 6 Error Codes IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes The IGP provides coded error messages to assist in debugging programs The printer will print an error message number and the program line which contains the error when an error is detected To help determine exactly where the error occurred use the following debug command sequence CC CREATE FORM NA
89. 28B height Hn of 5 inch starting at row SR 49 column SC 59 code the West Coast Sales Region as and print the data field PDF below the symbol Enter Format BARCODE BARCODE C128B H5 49 59 C128B VSCAN MAG Hn BF n L DARK SR SC WC D datafiela D PDF PDF LOC FONT STOP STOP Note The decimal point is not entered in the height parameter H5 above because values are expected 10 inch increments Values from 4 through 99 4 inch to 9 9 inches are accepted 244 Creating a Form and Adding Form Components 10 Add the logo and end the Create Form mode Use the Logo Call command specify the starting row SH at 12 and column SC at 18 as shown on the grid and call the logo by name HANDCRFT The starting row and column of the logo refer to the upper left corner of the grid used in the logo design Enter Format LOGO LOGO 12 18 HANDCRFT SR SC logoname STOP STOP END END 11 Execute the form HCBOATS return to the Normal mode remember the blank line before the NORMAL command exit the file using your system commands if necessary and print the document Enter Format EXECUTE HCBOATS cc EXECUTE formname PAGEn FC NORMAL cc NORMAL PRINT HNDCFT FOM System Format Note Always separate the EXECUTE and NORMAL commands u by a blank line Figure 57 shows the finished form If Mr Handcraft would like to rearrange the words change line thickne
90. 31 Q 51 2 32 R 52 3 33 S 53 4 34 T 54 5 35 U 55 6 36 V 56 7 37 W 57 8 38 X 58 9 39 Y 59 A 41 2 B 42 2D C 43 2 44 SPACE 20 E 45 3F F 46 2F G 47 2B H 48 25 l 49 S1 N A J 4A S2 N A K 4B S3 N A L 4C S4 NA M 4D Start N A N 4E Stop N A 4 106 Code 93 Code 93 Example The illustration below shows a horizontal Code 93 bar code generated by the following program CREATE TEST 288 Enters Create Form mode SCALE CHAR BARCODE Bar code command CODE93 X1 H7 10 20 ABCD5678 PDF B Printable data field END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST Prints form STOP Ends bar code command 1 NORMAL SC 20 WEM ABCD5678 SR 10 107 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Code 128A 128B and 128C The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 11 and described on the following pages rF 71 QUIETI SR SC SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE gt 0 r 1 I I OPTIONAL 1 DIGIT COW E i CW 1 OPTIONAL READABLE i DATA i i FIELD i OPTIONAL CHECK I i DIGIT I UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER I UPPER GUARD j GUARD GUARD 821 4 GUARD BAND E i BAND BAND EH BAND Ione ZONE ke HEIGHT HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC a POSITION mie
91. 5 Accessing Characters and Character Sets User Defined Set Command USET Purpose Creates custom character sets except OCR fonts from existing characters stored in memory Mode NORMAL Format cc USET n END cc Represents the Special Function Control Character USET The User Set command enter USET n Selects USET character set number enter a value ranging from 1 through 8 ca Represents the ASCII character cell hex address which will have its contents replaced with the character located in the font address fa The ca value must be one of the 16 hex values specified in Table 23 on page 255 fa Represents the hexadecimal value for the font address of a specified character in the Multinational character set which will replace the current contents of ca The fa value is the character substitution for the cell address ca The value of fa may range from 20 through FF hex END Ends the USET command Comments You can define up to 16 character substitutions for each of the eight user definable character sets It is not necessary to address all 16 spaces available for character substitutions with a single USET command The character sets in the USET command are numbered 1 through 8 The character set values in the Character Set Selection ISET command page 256 are numbered 24 through 31 and correspond to User Sets 1 through 8 The ISET command accesses and prints that custom character set The USET and IS
92. 5 and ITF 14 135 Mafia Sua M 141 5 Er 147 PDFE417 anie ei t ed 153 POSTNEFT zie atteinte meters 158 PostBar and Royal Mail 163 Une 167 UGG EAN 128 esed dtes oe sete ETE 173 Ld c MX EI EE 185 UPG E and UPGsEO dnce edet awam 191 EE 198 UPS ae ee va ns Wa a a 203 Incremental Bar Code Fields sse 208 Incrementing Bar Code Data 208 Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields 211 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields 212 Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields 214 4 Form Examples and Exercises 215 Form u edid edere eden dence cr 215 Example Basic Create 215 Example Dynamic Dat uuu l seen nee 218 FOrim EXerCISe une ie ve ott tet cte De Eie e te be RENE 228 Creating a Box and Corners sse 228 Adding Horizontal and Vertical Lines 230 Adding Fixed Alphanumeric 231 Adding a Bar 233 Eogo Exercise 2 2 n Fu dee cune e ur d s 236 Creating a LOGO 2 Gusan rete deae 237 Form Design i eoe en obe De e E 239 Table o
93. 8 12 0 0 FROM 6 3 12 2 2 MOTOR C15 7 3 16 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD 15 8 1 16 0 0 CA 92714 1071270 0 T10 14 8 11 0 0 S 0 19 8 11 0 0 S N 24 8 11 0 0 P N STOP HDUP OFF BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF1 8 DARK 15 1 10 4 PDF 0 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF2 8 DARK 20 10 4 PDF 0 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF3 8 DARK 25 5 10 4 PDF 0 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF4 8 DARK 15 1 47 4 PDF 0 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF5 8 DARK 20 47 4 PDF 0 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 BF6 8 DARK 25 5 47 4 PDF 0 STOP ALPHA AF1 20 10 8 AF2 20 11 8 AF3 21 12 8 8 8 AF4 20 10 AF5 20 11 222 AF6 20 12 8 4 STOP END 9 0 0 EXECUTE SA P AF1 B AND C 2 0 BO G GOS X 212 AF3 LOS AN AF4 M H IN ELES QU Example Dynamic Data CA 90051 AF5 101 BEACH RD AF6 MALIBU BF1 S05995 BF2 011233 BF3 190204 BF 4 S05996 BF5 000535 BF 6 104523 2 2 2 2 NORMAL CA 9 EXECUTE SAMP LE 7772 AF1 ABC CORPORATION 2 1234 AF3 YOUR TO AF4 XYZ CO AF5 845 N AF6 WEST BE BF1 05997 BF2 456789 BF3 102245 BF4 805999 BF5 567890 BF6 103764 H H 2 2 2 2 2 ORMAL YWHERE SI WN MA 03498
94. A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Codabar Table 9 Codabar Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 30 2 1 31 24 2 32 2 3 33 2F 4 34 2E 5 35 2B 6 36 A 41 7 37 B 42 8 38 C 43 9 39 D 44 Codabar Example CREATE TEST 288 Enter Create Form mode SCALE CHAR BARCODE Bar code command CODABAR VSCAN X1 H7 5 20 A2345B PDF B Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST NORMAL 4 wy rd 95 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Code 39 The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 8 and described on the following pages r 71 QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 9 I I OPTIONAL I COW i CW I
95. ADDRESS DATA Top Line NAME OF RECIPIENT Optional Line INFORMATION ATTENTION LINE Line Above Last DELIVERY ADDRESS Last Line POST OFFICE STATE ZIP Figure 18 FIM Structure 129 Chapter 3 Bar Codes SR SC POSITION INFORMATION ATTENTION LINE LastLine POST OFFICE STATE ZIP Top Line NAME OF RECIPIENT Optional Line Line Above Last DELIVERY ADDRESS lt lt LLI lt 2 2 S E c S o NOTE Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area Figure 19 FIM Structure VSCAN or CCW Note Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 Guide to Business Mail Preparation 130 FIM Clear Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank 1 4 inch wide 5 8 inch tall clear zone reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a nine position bar no bar pattern of tall full bars of uniform height Minimum height must be 5 8 inch 1 8 inch Bar height may be longer to wrap around the top of the envelope Minimum ba
96. ALPHA command See page 29 for more information In the Normal and Execute modes you can access OCR fonts using the Compressed Print Density command page 45 Note OCR fonts are only available in 10 cpi Y Data Bit 8 You can access individual characters using data bit 8 addressing The primary character set is ASCII These character values reside at hex addresses 20 through 7F The multinational or extended character sets reside at hex addresses 80 through FF and are accessible without reconfiguration Note Data bit 8 must be set high so that multinational or extended character sets are accessible without reconfiguration However the PION PIOFF command page 79 must 50 be set OFF to access these character sets in the 80 FF hex range A PION setting will cause data in the 80 FF hex range to be interpreted as PI line data instead of extended character set data Power Up Character Set Selection You can select any one of the twelve resident multinational character sets shown in Table 21 0 through 11 as the default character set at printer power up The IGP configuration settings determine which character set is the default character set at power up The character font selected at power up will remain active until the ISET command is selected or the configuration is changed OCR and user definable character sets cannot be configured as the default character set at printer power up 253 Chapter
97. ANTITY C15 9 6 2 0 0 Q 10 5 8 4 4 100 C15 11 9 28 0 0 SPECIAL 15 12 6 28 0 0 C 1 13 9 34 4 4 00002 A20UG C15 15 2 0 0 SUPPLIER CGl5 15 T1052 0505 15 6 7 2 2 040898755 C15 20 2 0 0 SERIAL S 205572625 0002110 C15 24 5 4 0 0 ACME MOTOR IRVINE CA 92713 714 863 1900 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 I DARKR 4 7 5 5 X000000002 A000000001 STOP BARCOD C3 9 H7 DARK 10 9 5 5 Q100 P STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 1 DARK 8 1 33 X00002 CA20UG STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 15 7 5 5 V040898755 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 20 8 5 5 50002110 STOP END EXECUTE AIAG 2 NORMAL 226 Example Dynamic Data ms PART MU 00000001 E 01055576 SERIAL 000211 ACNE MOTOR THE IRVINE 92713 714 853 1900 L Mb _ MILII m RETE MOTOR INC IRUIME 92713 214 883 1900 o TUM 100 UT xd wil I il ii inm WET SERIAL PART NO A0000000004 gt 100 MNA SUPPLIER lli am ium DOOS O211 ACHE MOTOR IRC IRUINE CA 92713 714 863 1920
98. ART QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE l 4 I S I UPPER GUARD BAND L z za eS a a a a 3 as OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 35 Telepen Structure 167 Chapter 168 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each character is represented by a different series of bars and spaces both wide and narrow but is always 16 units in width for a wide to narrow ratio of 3 Each character starts with a bar and ends with a space Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit A mandatory modulo 127 check digit is inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Telepen Telepen Command Format BARCODE TELEPEN DIR
99. ASCII Character set values 24 through 31 are reserved for user defined sets You can create custom character sets from existing characters in font memory If you select a set value from 24 to 31 when no new character set has been created or assigned that value the character font will default to ASCII Refer to page 257 for printouts of the primary and extended character sets and their corresponding values 251 Chapter 5 Introduction Character Addresses Both the ASCII and multinational character sets have hex values for each character and symbol The primary character set ASCII characters resides at hex addresses ranging from 00 to 7F The extended character set which contains the multinational characters resides at hex addresses ranging from 80 to FF Table 22 shows each multinational character substitution hex value and the applicable ASCII hex values To access the extended character set the IGP must be configured with the data bit 8 option enabled Making Character Substitutions Multinational character sets are created by substituting the multinational character values for the standard ASCII values Each of the 12 multinational character sets allows up to 16 character substitutions located at 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 60 7B 7C 7D and 7E hex The most common character substitutions specific to a particular country are provided in each set and shown in Table 22 For example when the Danish cha
100. ASK and STARTDATA command parameters as described in Table 5 The parameters are part of the Incremental Alphanumeric Fixed Data command or part of the Execute command when using incremental alphanumeric dynamic data The STEPMASK parameter performs the following three functions 1 Defines the increment amount step 2 Defines the number of characters allowed in the data field STARTDATA and 3 Provides a mask to link or unlink subfields of the data to be incremented independently The data provided in the STEPMASK field combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of these functions The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK data For example a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA by 1 a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2 The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA field is defined by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field the STARTDATA field cannot contain more characters than used in the STEPMASK field Alphanumerics Incremental Fields Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is defined by the L value in the STEPMASK field L indicates linked but non incremental data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA field any alpha character other than L in the STEPMASK field indicates a non incremental non linked STARTDATA subfield Table 5 Increment Alphanumeric STEPMASK START DATA Character
101. C E number Otherwise Error 96 will be generated PDF LOC FONT STOP UPC E and UPC EO Optional parameter which affects printing of the human readable data field The data field will print automatically unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter UPC E data fields can be printed above or below the bar code symbol If the PDF is not entered in the UPC E command format the data field automatically prints in OCR B Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field The default font type for UPC A bar codes is OCR B if no PDF command is entered in the command format the data field is printed automatically in OCR B Entering X will also designate the OCR B type font Enter N to select the normal ASCII 10 cpi font enter O to select the OCR A 10 cpi font Enter P to select 12 cpi Enter Q to select 13 cpi Enter R to selct 15 cpi Enter T to select 17 cpi Enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress printing the data field and the trailing lower portions of the UPC bar code Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entere
102. CC 23 SFON SFOFF Command 84 Slant italic Print 69 Special Function Control Character SFCC 23 Standard Command Format UCC EAN 128 179 Start load code 286 EVFU 286 STARTDATA Parameter 39 67 212 STEPMASK Parameter 38 66 211 Storing Data 25 Symbol Set See Configuration ISET USET 69 Symset 69 T Telepen 167 command format 169 example 172 structure 167 Terminator line 24 UC Parameter 30 UCC EAN 128 application identifiers 174 examples 182 standard command format 179 structure 173 UPC A 185 command format 187 example 190 structure 185 UPC E 191 command format 193 example 197 structure 191 UPCSHIP 198 command format 200 example 202 structure 198 Uppercase 23 Uppercase Parameter 30 UPS 11 203 command format 204 example 207 structure 203 User Defined Bar Code variable ratio size D 89 User Defined Character Sets multinational 254 USET Command 254 V Variable Ratio Size D user defined bar code 89 VDUP Command 56 VERT Command 73 Vertical Duplication Command 56 243 Vertical Formatting 61 Vertical Line Errors 263 Vertical Lines Command 73 Vertical paper motion 283 299 300 LA atkaro Copyright 2000 Hewlett Packard Company Manual Part Number 171250 001PX 171250 001A
103. E D Text D 32 22 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD 33 22 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 35 9 17 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER 40 3 17 0 0 PART NUMBER 40 3 50 0 0 MFG DATE 45 3 17 0 0 DESCRIPTION 49 3 17 0 0 INTERFACE 49 3 50 0 0 VERSION C13 31 16 0 0 FROM C15 54 26 0 0 Call ACME MOTOR for more information C15 55 34 0 0 1 714 863 1900 STOP STOP 231 Chapter 232 4 Form Exercise Note The sample data entered above uses CP DP format such as 35 9 40 3 etc in the starting row SH parameters This precisely positions the data to avoid overlapping the alphanumeric data with the box and horizontal line data previously entered For complete information on CP DP format refer to the Commands chapter At this point the PRACTC FRM file should contain the following form program data CREATE PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 D ER 0 13 57 64 5 7 D 0 16 61 5 16 61 9 16 61 D lt Q ir 2 O 0 Ej OH O gt gt gt J O N ERT 1 49 40 45 1 49 49 53 STOP ALPHA 31 22 0 0 MOTOR INC 32 22 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD 33 22 0 0 IRVINE 92714 35 9 17 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER 40 3 17 0 0 PART NUMBER 40 3 50 0 0 MFG DATE 45 3 17 0 0 DESCRIPTION 49 3 17 0 0 XINTERFACE 49 3 50 0 0 VERSION C13 31 16 0 0 FROM C15 54 26 0 0 Call ACME MOTOR for more inf
104. E FRM System Format DELETE FORM PRACTICE cc DELETE FORM formname DELETE FORM HCBOATS DELETE LOGO HANDCRFT LOGO ogoname PRINT DELETE FRM System Format Note List the directory again to verify that the forms and logos u were deleted A form cannot execute if insufficient space exists in the IGP memory The directory Dynamic Work Space Bytes Free must be greater than the total size in bytes of the form Delete older forms and or logos to allow memory space for new forms and logos or include the Delete command as the last statement in a logo or form program to immediately delete the data after it is processed Creating a form or logo with the same name as an existing IGP form or logo will automatically delete the existing form or logo Solving Program Errors 248 If you make an error in the program to create a form or an element in the form a coded error message and program line containing the error will print when the form is executed These error codes are defined in the Error Codes chapter To solve program errors perform the following steps 1 Locate the error message in the listing provided in the Error Codes chapter for a description of the error Analyze the related portion of the program to find the error Correct the error and reprint the file containing the program Example 4 Ifthe error persists or you cannot locate it in the program use the debug parameter in t
105. E data provided exceeds the maximum length for the bar code selected SFCC decimal input error must be 1 255 The hexadecimal value on the ASCII chart for the Special Function Control Character is not valid Refer to page 86 to select a valid SFCC Reverse Print Errors 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 REVERSE format error in input parameters Re enter the command with proper format REVERSE starting row SR ending row ER out of bounds Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element REVERSE starting SC ending column EC out of bounds Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element Insufficient memory to store the REVERSE element Insufficient memory space available for reversed print requirements PDF417 bar code sizing parameter illegal or too small for data PDF417 security level has illegal value or format Unusable or illegal raster data Unsupported raster image type Unsupported raster compression type Not defined EXECUTE form too wide for current page setting The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in another orientation Use the debug slash when creating a form to show which element is out of bounds see page 314 273 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 123 EXECUTE form too long for current page setting The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in another orientation Use the debug slash when creating a form to
106. EAN 128 is the same as the character set for Code 128 Refer to the Code 128 Character Set Table 13 and Table 14 Every character is interpreted according to the currently active character subset UCC EAN 128 uses subset B and subset C only Subset B shown in Table 13 includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters lowercase alphabetical characters and special characters Subset C interprets the characters as pairs of numbers 00 through 99 along with some special characters as shown in Table 14 The start code or subset switch code determines whether a particular bar code character is decoded as one character or as a pair of numbers Readable Data The optional printed data field PDF provides a human readable interpretation of the bar code data When the printed data field is enabled by use of the PDF parameter the overall height of the bars is reduced to make room for a guard band and the human readable characters The printed data field will be formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data fields such as the application identifier Special characters such as start stop subset switch modulo 103 check digit and FNC1 do not appear in the human readable data The readable data is oriented along the bar code from start code to stop code It may be positioned above or below a bar code and the bar code may be horizontal vertical or inverted 177 Chapter 178 3 Bar Codes Modulo 103 Check Digit A
107. ET commands are related as shown in Table 23 Therefore ISET 24 selects the substitution set defined as USET1 ISET 29 selects USET6 etc 254 User Defined Set Command USET Table 23 USET ISET Relationship USETn RUIT ISET n 1 24 2 25 26 4 n 27 5 28 6 29 7 n 30 n 8 n 31 Example The following example defines User Set 1 to contain the Multinational font addresses B1 A1 1 and BF at the hex cell addresses 23 24 and 25 respectively Therefore if ca 23 and fa B1 each time that cell address 23 is received it will select the character located at font address B1 USET1 237 BL 24 11 25 BF END User Set 1 now contains the following the plus or minus sign B1 hex in place of the number sign 23 hex the upside down exclamation point A1 hex in place of the dollar sign 24 hex and the upside down question mark BF hex in place of the percent sign 96 25 hex To print User Set 1 you must use the ISET command discussed on page 256 255 Chapter 256 5 Accessing Characters and Character Sets Character Set Selection Command ISET Purpose Mode Format Accesses one of the 32 multinational character sets from Table 21 Use this command to access a different character set from the configured power up default character set NORMAL CREATE and EXECUTE In Normal and Execute mod
108. Execute Normal commands which slows the process by performing an open print close form sequence the form feed character instructs the IGP to start a new page with new EVFU dynamic and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the form The EVFU Data Dynamic Data Overlay Data Form Feed Character sequence can be repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum print speed within the original Execute command Note When a form count is not specified a single line spacing or a line containing overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE command from NORMAL command To Execute Forms Rapidly In order to save reloading time the IGP remembers the last form executed However a form must be loaded if it was not the last form executed if it was used with a CREATE command since the last EXECUTE or if any logo has been created When the form is found in memory it is loaded and execution resumes otherwise the FORM NOT FOUND error is printed Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode The Execute Form mode has two print formats The standard execute command format shown on the next page is used for executing nonincremental data and incremental fixed data An incremental execute command format containing two additional parameters is used for executing incremental dynamic data and is discussed on page 65 During the Execute Form mode the IGP responds to regular print format commands such as 8 and elo
109. FF and IGON IGOFF All commands for the currently selected protocol in the ASCII emulation will be interpreted The IGP remains quiet until the LISTEN command page 74 enables standard IGP operation The Quiet command is ignored if the IGP is in the Execute Form mode Recall Purpose Loads the user pre stored program setup file setup ptx from flash memory into the printer This is done without sending a system reset Mode NORMAL Format cc RECALL Comments The file setup ptx is also automatically recalled into the printer upon a RESET command 81 Chapter 82 2 Command Codes Reset Purpose Deletes all forms and logos from IGP memory The Reset performs the following tasks e Prints any objects in the current page Deletes all forms and logos resident in memory Sets the font to the default Gothic 12 10 Releases all user defined character mappings Runs the SETUP PTX file if present NORMAL or EXECUTE Mode Format cc RESET cc RESET Reverse Print The Special Function Control Code The Reset command enter RESET Purpose Mode Format Defines an area of the form where form elements are reverse printed white on black CREATE REVERSE DARK SR SC EH EC STOP REVERSE DARK SH SC ER The Reverse Printing command enter REVERSE Optional parameter to select a denser black background Enter DARK or D to select the denser background
110. Form Mode commands are summarized in Table 2 and fully described on the referenced pages Print Boundaries Print area boundaries exist for the paper size selected All Create Form Mode commands require you to identify the location for the components in your form Boundary checking for form elements is performed only when the form length is specified This ensures that forms can be created regardless of the type of paper you have loaded or margins you have set The IGP checks the boundaries before the form is executed to ensure that it will fit on the loaded paper size If the debug option is used in the create statement the boundaries are checked against the current paper size Refer to Appendix C for more information regarding page boundary guidelines Create Logo Mode The Create Logo Mode is used in the Create Form Mode The Create Logo Mode creates a logo design this predefined logo is then called into a form in the Create Form Mode The logo must be defined before it is called 18 Modes of Operation Table 2 Create Form Mode Commands Command Mnemonic Description Page Alphanumerics ALPHA Defines size location and content of alphanumeric characters 29 and dynamic alphanumeric data fields Alpha Incremental ALPHA Defines starting data and increment amount for fixed auto 34 increment fields Bar Codes BARCODE Each bar code type has its own command to define size Chap 3 location orientation
111. Function Control Code NORMAL The Normal mode command enter NORMAL Comments Normal mode is entered automatically when the printer is powered on with IGP In Normal mode the IGP uses the default font and line spacing values A blank line or overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command unless a form count is given for the EXECUTE Page Number Purpose Mode Format Defines where a page number is placed on a form and automatically increases the page number on each page CREATE PAGE SH SC PAGE The Page Number command enter PAGE SR Defines the starting row of the page number Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 SC Defines the starting column of the page number Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 If the SR SC extends beyond the page boundaries an Error 76 will occur in the Execute Form mode and default page number SR SC values are used Comments To begin automatically incrementing the page numbers the Example PAGE 60 70 starting page number must be specified during the Execute command The following command places the page numbers at row 60 column 70 o
112. HE set to 0 selects standard character printing Example The following command results in character printing at 25 times its vertical size and 40 times its horizontal size EXPAND 25 40 2 68 Font Font Purpose Selects typefaces other than the default Gothic font Mode NORMAL CREATE EXECUTE Format FACE BOLD 1 SYMSET POINT 4 SPACE Note The font is activated according to the changed options upon u receipt of the font command cc The Special Function Control Code If you are using the Font command in the CREATE mode do not enter the SFCC FONT The Font command enter FONT FACE Identifies the specific typeface This option is ignored for line matrix printers BOLD Selects a bold attribute Enter BOLD a space and ON or 1 to turn bold on or OFF or 0 for no bold attribute SLANT Selects a slanting factor Slant is similar to italic but also offers a backward slant Enter SLANT a space and RIGHT or 1 for a typical italic slant LEFT or 1 for a backward slant or OFF or 0 for no slant attribute SYMSET Selects a font symbol set other than the default ASCII symbol set Enter SYMSET a space anda value representing the symbol set as identified in Table 21 on page 251 POINT Selects the point size for the current typeface Enter POINT a space and a point size ranging from 4 through 999 Point sizes are available in quarter point inc
113. I 147 command format 149 example 152 structure 147 Multinational Character Set features 251 OCR character sets 253 user defined sets 254 Multinational Character Set Errors 274 Multinational Character Sets data bit 8 253 ISET command 256 power up selection 253 N Normal Mode 16 78 Numeric Values used in command format 25 OCR Character Sets 253 Overlay Alphanumeric Data 27 298 P Page Layout Considerations 239 Page Number Command 78 Pagination 59 78 Paper Command 79 Paper motion vertical 283 PDF417 command format 153 example 157 PI line paper motion 283 PION PIOFF Command 79 Point Size 69 PostBar 163 command format 164 example 166 POSTNET 158 command format 161 structure 158 Power Up Character Set Selection multinational character sets 253 Print boundaries 18 reversed 14 Print File Command 80 Printable Character Delimiter 24 Printable Data Field Character Sizes 90 Prompt 25 Q Quiet Command 81 R Relative line slewing PI line 283 Repeat Count Parameter 38 66 211 Reset Command 82 Reset Count Parameter 39 67 211 Reverse Print 29 Reverse Print Command 82 Reverse Print Errors 273 Rotated Characters 30 Royal Mail 163 command format 164 example 166 RPT Parameter 38 66 211 RST Parameter 39 67 211 S Scale Command 83 Scaling capabilities 14 Select Format Command 84 Semicolon 23 SETUP Command 81 Setup Files Feature 85 SF
114. IGIT SR SC pa POSITION 9 M 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND QUIET START DATA FIELD Normal 15 HEIGHT LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD I LOWER GUARD BAND I HEIGHT INV I DATA FIELD l OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 26 MSI Structure 147 Chapter 148 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Code Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent each numeric character The structure is four wide elements bars or spaces and four narrow elements Each character contains four data bits with each 0 bit made up of a narrow bar wide space arrangement and each 1 bit made up of a wide bar narrow space arrangement Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit If specified the modulo 10 or
115. L parameters of the alphanumerics command in the Create Form mode Inputting individual commands enters the new data into the identified location each time the form is printed You can repeat the cc AF m D ASCII text D sequence to complete as many data fields as you defined on the form in the Create Form mode You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command in the same Execute command sequence Each page of dynamic data the dynamic fields data and overlay data for the form must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data Purpose Mode Format Incorporates the dynamic bar code data into a previously identified location on a form EXECUTE D data field D cc The Special Function Control Code BFn Indicates a dynamic bar code field BF and its data n Enter BF and replace n with the number of the data field corresponding to the number used to identify the field when it was defined with the bar code command during the Create Form mode D The printable character quotation marks for example identifying the start and finish of the bar code data Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but will not be printed data field Enter the characters for the bar code data The
116. LO Packar Line Jet Printers IGP PGL Technical Reference Manual LineJet M Printers IGP PGL Technical Reference Manual Hewlett Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Hewlett Packard COPYRIGHT 2000 HEWLETT PACKARD CO All rights reserved Trademark Acknowledgements IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corp IGP LinePrinter Plus PGL and Printronix are registered trademarks of Printronix Inc Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc Hewlett Packard and HP are registered trademarks and LineJet is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefa
117. Line Feeds and Form Feeds The most common method of advancing the print position with IGP is through the use of line feeds and form feeds A line feed moves the print position down a distance determined by the current line spacing Ipi In the Normal mode a form feed character advances the print position to the top of the next page in the Execute mode a form feed advances the print position to the top of the next form Form length is determined by the CREATE command Paper Motion Using the PI Line Relative Line Slewing The method of moving the print position using the PI line results in vertical slews of a specified number of lines relative to the current print position rather than slewing to a specific line For this to occur the following criteria must be met 1 The PI line must be enabled and set high and 2 Data bit 5 must be 1 set When a number of blank lines will be skipped on a form called paper slewing another method of paper motion may be used The PI signal can be detected by the IGP as the 8th data bit in a serial interface or a separate input line in a parallel interface Refer to the EN PI DIS PI command and the PION PIOFF commands on page 79 When the PI signal is used bits 6 and 7 are interpreted as 0 values and characters hex 10 through 1F are interpreted as binary slew commands 283 Appendix C Paper Motion Using the PI Line Relative Line Slewing The binary slew commands can skip from 1 thr
118. ME The slash places the IGP in a debug mode and the program prints line by line with the error number and message printed below the specific error in the program The error free portions of the form will print following the program After correcting the error s print the file again When the errors have been corrected delete the slash A sample debug listing is shown in Solving Program Errors on page 248 In the Execute mode that part of the form which was correctly defined and stored during the Create mode will print including any dynamic data and overlay text which was accepted before the error occurred Sections containing errors must be corrected before storage in the Directory can take place Any error messages will print following the printed form and processing will continue in the Normal mode In the Create Form or Create Logo mode any error messages will print first followed by that part of the form logo which was correctly defined Incorrectly defined elements are excluded from the form logo The error codes are broken down into categories In each category the number preceding each error message is the actual error code reported by the printer and the error shown in bold is the error message printed 261 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Horizontal Line Errors 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 262 HORiZontal line starting row SR out of bounds The row specified by the second par
119. More information about dark printing is provided on page 28 Defines the starting row of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the ending row of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Scale If the ending row is less than the starting row the rows are automatically switched The same is done with the ending and starting column EC Defines the ending column of the reverse print field Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 STOP Stop indicates the end of the REVERSE command enter STOP and the IGP will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP will expect another set of Reverse Print command parameters Comments You can use
120. P END EXECUTE PRACTICE AF1 49114 AF2 106772 902 AF3 INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR AF4 NPARALLEL CENTRONICS BF1 49114 NORMAL FRIN ACME MOTOR INC 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD IRVINE CA 92714 COLUMN 19 3 COLUMN 39 SERIAL NUMBER sow t gt 49114 PART NUMBER ROW 43 106772 902 DESCRIPTION ROW 47 3 INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSO INTERFACE ROW 51 3 PARALLEL CENTRONICS 63 1900 Adding a Bar Code E MOTOR for more information ROW 35 7 MFG DATE R VERSION Call ACHE NOTOR for nore information 714 863 1900 Figure 53 Completed Practice Form Example 235 Chapter 4 Logo Exercise Logo Exercise 236 In this exercise you will generate a logo The following sample uses a hand logo Using dot scaling discussed in detail on page 83 on an 8 1 2 x 11 inch form a hand was drawn on a grid with each dot tabulated by row and column position If a grid coordinate occupies half or more of a dot position include that position in your logo program Grid samples are located in Appendix B Each dot position used must be identified individually However you can use a hyphen between the starting and ending columns to indicate a section of consecutive dots For example this hand logo requires dots in row 1 columns 40 42 shown in Figure 54 A sequential row order is not required A logo is created and stored as an element in the definition of a form For example to us
121. PMASK field L indicates linked but nonincrementing data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA field Any alphanumeric character other than L in the STEPMASK field indicates a nonincrementing non linked STARTDATA subfield The following examples illustrate incrementing of bar code data fields All cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset count parameter value of 0 Incremental bar code data is generated identically to incremental alphanumeric data except the IGP does not add leading spaces to bar code data Note In the following bar code examples the value of the data is shown automatically incrementing In practical applications the bar code itself would print corresponding to the incremented data as shown in the Auto Increment Fields Example in the Form Examples and Exercises chapter 209 Chapter 3 Incremental Bar Code Fields Value Description STARTDATA ABC123 Linked subfields ABC and 123 STEPMASK 000001 RPT 1 0 Printed Results ABC123 ABC124 ABC999 ABD000 222999 AAA000 Value Description STARTDATA 1ABC123 Two separate but linked numeric STEPMASK 0111001 subfields 1 and 123 while fixed data I ABC is nonincrementing Printed Results 1ABC123 RPT 1 1ABC124 s xz RPT 0 1ABC999 2 000 Value Description STARTDATA ABC123 Two separate unlinked subfields STEPMASK 001 1 ABC and 3 while fixed data 1 and 2 is non
122. R SYSTEM SR SC CHARACTER FIELD POSITION wawapa ESQ 1 INV QUIET 1 quiet I ZONE HEIGHT RIGHT DATA I Lc FIELD N a ml T TART CODE 707 CODE M CHARACTER CHECK DIGIT FIELD 29 1 QUIET SR SC ZONE NUMBER COW POSITION 1 SYSTEM CW CHARACTER START CODE NUMBER CHECK SYSTEM SR SC DIGIT CHARACTER POSITION CHARACTER FIELD STOP CODE 1 DGT FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE CENTER DATA CODE FIELD OPTIONAL READABLE CENTER CODE DATA FIELD CHECK 1 FIELD 1 STOP CODE NUMBER QUIET lt SYSTEM ZONE CHECK CHARACTER L Cy lt START CODE FIELD e CHARACTER 2 or 5 1 NUMBER ADD ON 1 L SYSTEM CODE CHARACTER gt gt Figure 38 UPC A Structure 185 Chapter 186 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The IGP automatically produces an 11 module wide left quiet zone you are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the right quiet zone The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided
123. RCODE EAN13 1 DIR SCB MAG Hn m BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE EAN13 Designates bar code type EAN 13 enter EAN13 n Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code data field Enter a plus sign and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern No center or right guard pattern exists DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented SCB This option shortens the length of the center guard bars which are normally full length MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 8 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height adjustment
124. SCAN 10 5 Vertical Telepen barcode at SR 10 SC 5 AB1282 Data Field PDF B Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code Command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE TELEPEN 1 Execute the form form count of 1 SC 5 SR 10 MI Figure 36 Sample Telepen Bar Code 172 UCC EAN 128 UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 structure is shown in Figure 37 and described on the following pages 71 QUIETI QUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE PS 9 OPTIONAL CHECK e 1 I I I I I DIGIT CCW CW I I I I OPTIONAL I 1 READABLE I 1 DATA I FIELD I I OPTIONAL 1 7 CHECK 1 I DIGIT UPPER 1 LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD 791 GUARD GUARD 1 qu GUARD BAND I BAND BAND BAND ZONE ke HEIGHT ke HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC rA POSITION e M Ses UPPER GUARD BAND 5 DE 1 l QUIET ODE DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal D Ej Sez HEIGHT LOWER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR sC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND 1 lan 1 HEIGHT INV I QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONES I I utasa ist J Y pl OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 37 UCC EAN 128 Structure 1738 Chapter 3 Bar Co
125. SPURUHESUNOOESHRSUIUYRSEESERUS Ca p DL massa i SR 40 5 a JA 540 04 EEE ITE 2222 2223 terere EEN LASER ne ae A eT a BF ST EY Bs DLP IN Ng 22222277 4 N E Figure 9 Sample Code 39 Bar Codes 101 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Code 93 The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 10 and described on the following pages QUIETI IQUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 0 E OPTIONAL CHECK CCW DIGIT OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD UPPER LOWER LOWER GUARD J GUARD GUARD I J BAND ar QUIET ZONE ke HEIGHT HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 9 ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 1 UPPER GUARD BAND xy is 1 l I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal ae d LOWER GUARD BAND L 4 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Ei LOWER GUARD BAND 1 viu INV QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE 1 iy a UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 10 Code 93 Structure 102 CW OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER lt GUARD BAND HEIGHT
126. SR SC POSITION 9 UPPER GUARD BAND 1 E 1 1 QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal ZONE CODE CODE zone 1 HEIGHT l LOWER GUARD BAND I 1 L 4 OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD LOWER GUARD BAND 1 i 1 HEIGHT INV I QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET 1 CODE ZONEI I I Lukas d S J Y wu OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 42 UPCSHIP Structure 198 UPCSHIP Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements The UPCSHIP barcode must contain exactly 13 digits of numeric data Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 ch
127. The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard printable character delimiters just as a standard bar code data field is enclosed within delimiters CREATE TEST 288 Enters Create Form mode VDUP 3 6 BARCODE Bar code command C3 9 H7 15655 00001 12345 PDF Printable data field STOP Ends bar code command VDUP OFF END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE TEST Prints form NORMAL 12345 12344 12343 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command specifies the location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during the Create Form mode STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the Execute command during the Execute Form mode As with standard dynamic data fields incremental dynamic data fields allow you to change the starting data without changing the form definition program Additionally you can also change the increment parameters with each new job without changing the form definition program 212 Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of the standard IGP bar code commands Use this command with the appropriate parameters from the standard Bar Code command when automatic incrementing of dynamic bar code data fields is required The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command format is shown and defined below Incremental comman
128. U channels is 192 e Changing the LPI unloads the EVFU 61 Chapter 62 2 Command Codes Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data Purpose Mode Format Incorporates the dynamic alphanumeric data into a previously identified location on a form EXECUTE cc AF m D ASCII text D cc The Special Function Control Code AFn Indicates a dynamic alphanumeric field AF and its data n Enter AF and replace n with the number of the data field corresponding to the number used to identify the field when it was defined with the Alphanumeric command in the Create Form mode D The printable character identifying the start and finish of the alohanumeric data Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but will not be printed with the data ASCII text The group of ASCII characters the alphanumeric string to print Enter any of the standard ASCII printable characters except the character used as delimiters described in the D parameter The data appears on the form at the location identified by the value of n Note 1 Be sure to enter Dynamic Alphanumeric Data after the Execute command and or EVFU data but before any Overlay Data See the general Execute command format on page 59 Comments The location for the dynamic alphanumeric data must have been previously identified using the AFn
129. UIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET mmm LOWER GUARD BAND i OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD P T LOWER GUARD BAND 1 i HEIGHT INV 1 QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET zoNE CODE GONE 1 a L I I UPPER GUARD BAND D sss sy a Sas 3 OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT Figure 7 Codabar Structure 91 Chapter 92 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code
130. VDUP OFF VERT 2 1 1 61 3 STOP HORZ 2 1 1 75 STOP VDUP 12 5 ALPHA 1 5 5 76 0 0 05 5 STOP VDUP OFF HDUP 14 5 ALPHA C15 1 61 9 5 0 0 05 5 STOP HDUP OFF END EXECUTE GRID 1 279 10 15 20 25 30 35 PTET HEE 40 45 50 55 60 The Logo Grid The program for a logo grid is listed below and the sample grid follows It is not the full size logo grid the grid can measure up to 240 columns wide by 252 rows high for a logo 4 x 3 5 inches Photocopy the grid or enter the grid program to obtain a printout CREATE LOGOGRID HDUP 75 1 VERT 1 4 4 56 STOP HDUP OFF HDUP 5 15 ALPHA C17 1 3 8 2 0 0 15 05 C17 1 3 13 2 0 0 15 10 1 3 18 2 0 0 15 715 STOP VERT 2 18 3 5 56 1 8 3 9 56 1 13 3 9 56 STOP HDUP OFF VDUP 105 0 6 HORZ 1 4 4 78 STOP VDUP OFF VDUP 7 7 6 ALPHA C17 1 5 11 79 0 0 015 C17 1 8 6 79 0 0 015 10 13 11 5 78 2 0 0 015 715 STOP HORZ 2 10 11 4 79 5 1 6 4 79 1 8 6 4 79 STOP VDUP OFF END EXECUTE LOGOGRID 1 281 C Vertical Paper Motion Introduction There are three methods of advancing the print position with the IGP which are explained in this appendix 1 Using line feeds or form feeds 2 Using the paper instruction line or 3 Using the Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU Paper Motion Using
131. XX00001 400P0119600001 PDF STO ALP DAR ST E D 7B p HA K 1 20 0 0 PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER D EXE CUT UCCINC 3 NO RMAL PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER IIAII II TIT 400 PO119600002 PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER EAM 400 PO01196500003 183 Chapter 3 Bar Codes The following example shows the use of dynamic data The ship to postal code 420 is used to encode 5 digit ZIP Codes CREATE UCCDYN 140 BARCODE UCC 128 BF1 8 3 20 PDF X STOP LPHA ARK 1 20 0 0 SHIP TO POSTAL EXECUTE UCCDYN BF1 42092614 NORMAL EXECUTE UCCDYN BF1 42090210 NORMAL EXECUTE UCCDYN 1 42090028 2 vv nj NORMAL SHIP TO POSTAL HII 4205092614 SHIP TO POSTAL 420090210 SHIP TO POSTAL mI amp 20 90028 184 UPC A UPC A The UPC A bar code structure is shown in Figure 38 and described on the following pages SR SC START CODE CENTER CODE POSITION hal STOR eis 4 1 QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA QUIET Normal ZONE FEED ZONE HEIGHT NUMBER 1 SYSTEM LN_ _ _ _ RORIS ide cm t CHECK DIGIT NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK DIGIT FIELD CHARACTER CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD NUMBE
132. a length L of 5 The actual data will be provided dynamically in the Execute Form mode Specify the starting row SH 35 7 and starting column SC 39 and stop the command Enter BARCODE C3 9 H8 BF1 5 DARK 35 7 39 STOP Format BARCODE C3 9 CD VSCAN MAG Hn BF n L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP 233 Chapter 4 FormExercise 12 To dynamically input alohanumeric data fields first identify the locations for the data in the Create Form mode as part of the form definition Enter the locations in the existing Alpha command sequence or use a new Alpha command In the Alpha command sequence enter the alphanumeric field AF the field number n length L starting row SR and column SC and any vertical VE or horizontal HE expansion To enter this alohanumeric data in the existing Alpha command sequence the data must be entered before the existing Alpha command STOP line Enter AF1 7 38 7 19 3 3 3 AF2 11 43 20 2 2 AF3 31 47 3 20 2 1 AF4 33 51 3 20 2 1 Format ALPHA previously input R E Cn AF n L DIR UC SR SC VE HE D Text D STOP previously input 13 Supply the dynamic data during the Execute Form mode following the EXECUTE PRACTICE line Use the SFCC specify the dynamic alphanumeric field AF bar code field BF the field number corresponding to those just entered in the form definition and the data itself This method can be repeated to supply new
133. acters The string contains more than 255 characters 44 ALPHA format or delimiter error in input parameters Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the alpha command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a A missing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon c Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters e Delimiter found within text string 45 Insufficient memory to store the ALPHA string No more room in the IGP memory exists for another alpha string The rest of the Alpha commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing of the form will then continue normally To create space in the IGP memory delete forms with alpha string elements that are no longer required 46 ALPHA X expansion HE and Y expansion VE must be zero When the expanded character parameters VE and HE are used within the ALPHA command both values must be either zero or non zero values If the elongated characters parameter E or the compressed characters parameter Cn is used in the ALPHA command the VE and HE values must be set to 0 47 ALPHA X expansion factor HE out of bounds 113 The horizontal expansion factor is greater than 113 48 ALPHA Y expansion factor VE out of bounds 113 The vertical expansion factor is greater than 113 266 49 Logo Errors ALPHA compression factor Cn error 1
134. adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 4 through 9 9 inches The default value is 1 3 inches The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field a Enter BF DARK SR SC D data field PDF EAN 8 b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at seven digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the leng
135. ameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form HORiZontal line starting column SC out of bounds The left starting column of the horizontal line specified by the third parameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form HORiZontal line ending column EC out of bounds The right ending column of the horizontal line specified by the fourth parameter in the horizontal line command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form HORiZontal line format or delimiter error Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the horizontal line command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a A missing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon c Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters Insufficient memory to store the HORiZontal line No more room in the IGP memory exists for another horizontal line The rest of the horizontal line commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP memory delete forms with horizontal line elements that are no longer required HORiZontal line starting column SC ending column EC The left starting column parameter of the horizontal line command is greater than or equal to the right
136. amically during the Execute Form mode Dynamically entering data during the Execute Form mode permits changes to the alphanumeric text without redefining or re creating the form To use this field perform the following steps a Enter AF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the alphanumeric string 29 Chapter 2 Command Codes DIR UC DARK SR SC 30 location on the form The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the alphanumeric field identified by n c Replace L with a number equal to the number of characters in the dynamic alphanumeric string ranging from 1 through 512 d Dynamically enter the alphanumeric string itself in the Execute Form mode The length of the alphanumeric string must be equal to or less than the value assigned to the length L parameter Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data on page 62 e If the dynamic data field is used do not enter the ASCII TEXT parameter Optional parameter for rotating a character string Use the following codes to indicate the direction of character rotation a Enter CW for 90 degree clockwise rotation b Enter CCW for 90 degree counterclockwise rotation c Enter INV for inverted characters 180 degree rotation The default orientation prints character strings in the standard horizontal format Enter UC to specify uppercase only characters When uppercase only is specified all lowerc
137. aracters When the string is broken non numeric data or an unpaired numeric digit occurs the IGP PGL automatically inserts either a Code A or Code B and returns to their respective symbols The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 12 Table 13 and Table 14 beginning on page 113 111 Chapter 112 3 Bar Codes PDF LOC FONT STOP Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not
138. arameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed on one or more forms before it is reset to the starting value A reset count is useful when printing a hierarchy of fields where a low level field generates a sequence of numbers is reset and the next higher field level is incremented such as in a unit box carton application To use the reset count parameter enter RST and replace n with a number ranging from 1 to 65 535 to specify the reset count The default reset count value is 0 STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field Enter the appropriate value Refer to Using Incremental Alphanumeric Data on page 34 for complete information on STARTDATA and STEPMASK parameter values The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters must be equal to or less than the number of characters in the STEPMASK field If the number of data characters is less than the number used in STEPMASK the data will print right justified with preceding spaces Characters allowed for incrementing fields STEPMASK values of 0 9 are numeric 0 9 and alpha A Z uppercase only Any printable character is allowed in nonincrementing fields STEPMASK values not 0 9 The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard printable character delimiters just as a standard alphanumeric data field is enclosed within delimiters Comments The Incremental Alphanumeric Fixed Data Fields command is a revised version of the standard IGP al
139. ase alpha character codes are converted automatically to uppercase Consequently do not specify uppercase only characters if lowercase characters are required Optional parameter to produce bolder text Enter DARK or D D is also allowed in the ALPHA command only More information about dark printing is provided on page 28 Defines the starting row of the alphanumeric data Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the alphanumeric data Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 POINT Alphanumerics Optional parameter that changes the units for the vertical and horizontal expansion values When the point parameter is present the VE value defines the font height in 1 72 of an inch i e points If the HE value is non zero it defines the character width in 1 72 of an inch otherwise the character width is the standard width for the chosen height Cannot be used with elongated E and compressed parameters HSn or HSDn Horizontal Spacing The value n indicates the VE HE D text STOP number of extra dots to add between each character HS the value is in 60 DPI dots HSD
140. ata fields If unique data fields are required do not duplicate the commands BARCODE First bar code command Upper left S O field assigned number 1 C3 9 H7 BF1 8 DARK 15 1 10 4 PDF O Print the data field in OCR A font STOP Stop the first bar code command BARCODE New bar code command Upper left S N field assigned number 2 C3 9 H7 BF2 8 DARK 20 10 4 PDF O STOP BARCODE Upper left P N field assigned number 3 C3 9 H7 BF3 8 DARK 25 5 10 4 PDF O STOP BARCODE Upper right S O field assigned number 4 C3 9 H7 BF4 8 DARK 15 1 47 4 PDF O STOP BARCODE Upper right S N field assigned number 5 C3 9 H7 BF5 8 DARK 20 47 4 PDF O STOP BARCODE Upper right P N field assigned number 6 3 9 7 6 8 25 5 47 4 PDF O STOP Stop the bar code command 220 Example Dynamic Data Dynamic Alphanumeric Fields Identify the location of the dynamic alphanumeric fields using the alphanumerics command Input the following alohanumeric command lines after the HDUP OFF command and before the Create Form mode END line A separate alphanumerics command sequence is used in order to assign unique numbers to each dynamic data field If unique identifying numbers were not required these alphanumeric commands would be added to the existing alohanumeric commands being duplicated to produce the fixed form alphanumeric data Note Before the following dynamic data co
141. ata field STOP POSTNET Example Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value within the 1 2 inch left and right margins of the mail piece Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC ora character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The bar code data Enter 5 digits for zip code 9 digits for a nine digit zip code or 11 digits for the Advanced Bar Code format The available characters for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message will result Figure 32 illustrates a horizontal POSTNET bar code generated by the following program CREATE POSTNET BARCODE POSTNET DARK 10 40 601159912 STOP END EXECUTE POSTNET 1 Enter Create Form mode Bar Code command Dark POSTNET bar code at SR 10 SC 40 ZIP 4 data field 60115 9912 Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form mode Execute the form with a form count of 1 SR 10 5 40 Figure 32 Sampl
142. ating and reset to the starting value after a specified number of increments 2 Commands IGP Command Standards IGP commands have many options and a specific format that you must follow to obtain the desired results Certain elements are standard for all IGP commands These command standards are described in the following sections Familiarize yourself with the meaning and use of these standards before operating the IGP Special Function Control Code SFCC The SFCC identifies a command directed to the IGP to enable a specific IGP function Based on the host computer interface requirements various characters can be selected as the SFCC such as the caret or a tilde Do not use a nonprintable character as your SFCC It is appropriate to place the SFCC command at the beginning of a new line If the SFCC command is placed anywhere else on the line at the user s discretion the data preceding the command will either print or be ignored depending on how the Skip Command Prefix parameter is set The examples in this manual use the tilde as the SFCC always substitute the actual SFCC required by your system where the tilde is shown In the general command formats the SFCC is represented by cc Semicolon Each parameter alpha data options etc on the command line is separated by a semicolon Blank spaces between the semicolon and the next parameter are not allowed A missing or misplaced semicolon causes an error
143. atrix 141 MSI 147 PostBar 163 POSTNET 158 Royal Mail 163 Telepen 167 UCC EAN 128 173 UPC A 185 UPC E 191 UPCSHIP 198 UPS 11 203 Batch form processing 14 Bold Print See Font 69 Box command 43 Box Errors 264 C Channel assignments EVFU 286 Character Position Dot Position CP DP Format 26 Character Set 293 ASCII 277 Character Sets accessing 253 extended 14 multinational 14 OCR 253 user defined 254 Character Sizes Printable Data in Barcodes 90 Characters height width 14 printable 24 rotated 14 Special Function Control Character 23 Clearing EVFU memory 288 Codabar 91 command format 92 example 95 Code 128A 108 Code 128B 108 command format 110 example 116 Code 128C 108 example 117 Code 39 96 233 command format 98 example 101 structure 96 Code 93 102 example 107 structure 102 Command Parameters 24 Command Standards comments in command lines 25 numeric values 25 prompt 25 Commands alphanumerics 29 Bar Code 233 box 43 Codabar 92 Code 128B 110 294 Code 39 98 comments in command line 25 Compressed Print 45 Configuration CONFIG 46 Corner 49 Create 51 Create Form Mode 18 19 Create Logo 76 237 Data Bit 8 79 Delete Form 52 Delete Logo 53 density 45 Directory 53 directory 247 Duplicating Incremental Alphanumerics 41 EAN 13 125 EAN 8 120 Emulation Switching 57 Enable Disable PI 80 End 57 Execute Dynamic
144. but it will not print with the data Enter the data for the bar code A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 11 except the system SFCC Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch 105 Chapter 3 Bar Codes FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Table 11 Code 93 Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 30 P 50 1
145. c Meters n4 n6 320 Net Weight Pounds n4 n6 321 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches n4 n6 322 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet n4 n6 323 Length Or 1st Dimension Yards n4 n6 324 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches n4 n6 325 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet n4 n6 326 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards n4 n6 327 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches n4 n6 328 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet n4 n6 174 UCC EAN 128 Table 17 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued i ier AI Content Format 329 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards n4 n6 330 Gross Weight Kilograms n4 n6 331 Length or 1st Dimension Logistics n4 n6 332 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 6 333 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 n6 334 Area Square Meters Logistics n4 n6 335 Gross Volume Liters n4 n6 336 Gross Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 337 Kilograms Per Square Meter n4 n6 340 Gross Weight Pounds n4 n6 341 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 342 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 343 Length Or 1st Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 344 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches Logistics
146. cation check with your Postal Service for more information enter one of the following FIM types A Used only on courtesy reply envelopes bearing a preprinted POSTNET bar code page 158 it requires a luminescent stamp or meter mark to be accepted in the facer canceler B Used on Business Reply Mail Penalty Mail and Franked Mail without a preprinted POSTNET bar code and does not require luminescent indicia C Used on Business Reply Mail Penalty Mail or Franked Mail bearing a preprinted POSTNET bar code page 158 132 FIM D Used on OCR readable mail usually courtesy reply window envelopes without a preprinted POSTNET bar code STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results FIM Example Figure 20 below illustrates a horizontal FIMB bar code generated by the following program without the POSTNET preprinted bar code POSTNET is discussed on page 158 CREATE FIMB Enter Create Form Mode ALPHA Alpha command 23 11 0 0 PRINTRONIX INC 25 11 0 0 ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE 27 11 0 0 P O BOX 19559 29 11 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 9559 STOP Ends Alpha command BARCODE Bar Code command FIM DARK 15 22 Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 15 SC 22 B Data field selecting FIMB Bar Code Terminates Create Form Mode Executes the form form count of 1 STOP Ends FIMB Bar Code co
147. ces and Intellifont technology Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Garth Graphic Intellifont and Type Director are registered trademarks and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Bodoni CG Century Schoolbook CG Goudy Old Style CG Melliza Microstyle CG Omega and CG Palacio are products of Agfa Corporation CG Times based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and or its subsidiaries Letraset is a registered trademark and Aachen Revue and University Roman are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation Futura is a registered trademark of Fundici n Tipogr fica Neufville S A ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Benguiat ITC Bookman ITC Century ITC Cheltenham ITC Clearface ITC Galliard ITC Korinna ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Souvenir ITC Tiepolo ITC Zapf Chancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation Albertus Gill Sans and Times New Roman are registered trademarks and Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc registered in the U S Pat and TM office and elsewhere Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography Inc Table of Contents u aa Da 13 About this Manual oe acu te a Aha aya 13
148. character types allowed in the data varies with the bar code type Refer to the data field descriptions for the selected bar code types The data appears on the form at the location identified by n Note 1 Be sure to enter Dynamic Bar Code Data after the Execute command and or EVFU data but before any Overlay Data See the general Execute command format on page 59 Comments The bar code location must have been previously identified using the or BFn parameters of a bar code command in the Create Form mode Use the appropriate bar code command to enter the bar code data in that location Inputting individual commands enters new bar code data into the identified location each time the form is printed You can repeat the cc BF n D data field D sequence to complete as many bar code data fields as were defined on the form in the Create Form mode You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command in the same Execute command sequence Each page of dynamic data the dynamic fields data and overlay data for the form must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed 63 Chapter 64 2 Command Codes Execute Form Dynamic Logo Purpose Mode Format Incorporates the dynamic graphic logo into a previously identified location of a form EXECUTE cc GF m D logoname D cc The Special Function Control Code GFn Indicates the dynamic logo field Enter GF and replac
149. code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field The default font type for UPC A bar codes is OCR B if no PDF command is entered in the command format the data field is printed automatically in OCR B Entering X will also designate the OCR B type font Enter N to select the normal ASCII 10 cpi font enter O to select the OCR A 10 cpi font Enter P to select 12 cpi Enter Q to select 13 cpi Enter R to selct 15 cpi Enter T to select 17 cpi Enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress printing the data field and the trailing lower portions of the UPC bar code Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 189 Chapter 3 190 SR 39 gt Bar Codes UPC A Example Figure 39 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC A bar code generated by the following program BARCODE UPC A45 H9 DARK 39 15 Dark Code UPC A 5 digit 1234567887655555 PDF STOP BARCODE add o Data Prin Ends New 5 VSCAN H12 DARK 39 Vertical Dark UPC A 5 digit SR 39 SC 50 1234567887655555 PDF STOP END EXECUTE UPCA 1 SC 15 23456 78876 add o Data Prin n H 0 9 Bar Code 250 DH 122 Enter Create Form mode Bar Code command SR 39 SC command
150. corner specified by the second parameter in the corner command will place the corner outside the boundaries of the form CORNER ending column EC out of bounds The right ending column specified by the fifth parameter in the corner command places the corner outside the form boundaries CORNER ending row ER out of bounds The lower ending row of the corner specified by the fourth parameter in the corner command will place the corner outside the boundaries of the form CORNER horizontal length HL out of bounds The length of the horizontal arms of the corner specified by the seventh parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the corner to extend outside the form boundaries CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds The length of the vertical arms of the corner specified by the sixth parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the corner to extend above or below the boundaries of the form CORNER format or delimiter error in input parameters Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the corner command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a A missing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters Insufficient memory to store the CORNER No more room in the IGP memory exists for another corner The rest of the corner commands are flushed
151. d Select Format tells the IGP to ignore all host generated paper movement commands CR LF FF Example Basic Create Form LISTEN LOGO HAND 56 60 1 40 42 2 38 42 3 36 42 4 35 42 5 33 41 6 31 40 7 30 38 8 29 36 9 28 35 10 27 34 52 54 11 24 33 48 54 12 22 31 45 54 13 19 30 41 54 14 16 29 38 53 15 13 29 36 51 16 11 29 33 48 17 9 44 18 7 42 19 6 39 20 4 36 215 Chapter 4 Form Examples 56 35 36 END CREATE BOX LT SR SC ER EC 1 1 17 24525 STOP ALPHA RID L E Cn AFn L JDARK SR SC VE HE D ASCII TEXT D 3 3 0 0 STATIC ALPHA DATA AF1 18 4 3 0 0 DIR SR SC VE HE CW 8 4 1 1 Hewlett Packard Ry 3357 25 23 IGP STOP CORNER LT SR SC ER EC VL HL 1218225 2S eee LR STOP HDUP 5 1 VERT 10718522 STOP HDUP OFF VDUP 5 1 HORZ 1 O oa A EFTHAND 216 Example Basic Create Form STOP VDUP OFF LEFTHAND 0 13 HAND TOP FJ EXECUTE LEFTHAND AF1 DYNAMIC ALPHA DATA OVERLAY DATA NORMAL STATIC ALPHA DATA DYNAMIC ALPHA DATA OVERLAY DATA paexaeg a3armar IGP a Figure 46 Basic Create Form Example 217 Chapter 218 4 Form Examples Example Dynamic Data The process of executing dynamic alphan
152. d an error message results 195 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 18 Eleven Digit Compression 1 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X 0 0 0 __ X X 1 0 0 first two digits of last three digits of third digit of the X X 2 0 0 manufacturer s the product number manufacturer s number number use 0 through 2 only 2 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X 3 0 0 ___ NE 3 X X 9 0 0 first three digits of last two digits of the depends on how manufacturer s product number use many digits appear number 00 99 only in the manufacturer s number 3 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X 0 ____ _ 4 first four digits of last digit of product depends on how manufacturer s number use 0 many digits appear number through 9 only in the manufacturer s number 4 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X all five digits of last digit of product manufacturer s number use 5 9 number only 196 UPC E and UPC EO Table 19 Six Digit Zero Expansion if the 6 digit number ends with then the MFPS number is and the Product Number is 0 Example 124560 the first 2 digits of the zero suppressed number plus 000 12000 00 plus the THIRD FOURTH and FIFTH digit of the zero suppr
153. d parameters are shown in boldface type standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are shown in italics BARCODE type VSCAN MAG Hn IBFn L DARK SR SC PDF LOC FONTI STOP IBFn L Identifies this bar code command as an Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command The command parameter string identifies the incremental dynamic data field location on the form and defines the length of the bar code data Note If these parameters are used do not enter the STEPMASK STARTDATA parameters the Create Form mode enter them dynamically during the Execute Form mode To use the incremental dynamic data field a Enter IBF to specify an incremental bar code dynamic data field Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code string location on the form The standard bar code SR and SC command parameters specify the exact location of the field identified by n Replace L with a number equal to the number of characters in the dynamic bar code string STARTDATA The number of characters and type of characters depends on the type of bar code used Refer to the individual bar code descriptions for information on type and quantity of data allowed for the specific bar code type Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form mode The length of the data must be less than or equal to the value assigned to the
154. data to each form printed by separating the pages of data with a form feed Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data on page 62 Enter Format AF1 49114 cc AF n D data D AF2 106772 902 AF3 INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR AF4 PARALLEL CENTRONICS BF1 49114 cc BFn D data D 14 Now the PRACTC FRM file contains all the following information the complete form program Print the form by printing the file The completed form is shown in Figure 53 CREATE PRACTICE BOX 2339716 93761 STOP ER 0 13 57 64 5 7 D N 0 16 61 5 16 61 9 16 61 D x lt H 9 40 45 9 49 53 J gt n rg O S HA 1 22 0 0 MOTOR INC 32 22 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD 33 22 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 35 9 17 0 0 SERIAL NUMBER Co p n gt lt Q 3 234 40 3 17 0 402375050 4543717703 4937 E770 49 3 50 0 13 531516 C15 54 26 C15 55 34 1 7 38 7 AF2 11 43 2 AF3 31 47 3 4 33 51 3 C Gy ex PART NUMBER MFG DA ex DESCRIP ION MM INTERFAC FVERSION 0 FROM 0 Call ACM 0 714 8 197533 3 73 05 22 2 05 21 20524 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H8 BF1 5 DARK 35 7 39 STO
155. decimal input error in input parameter The USET command was expecting a decimal parameter and either received none or received an alpha character 152 USET character set n parameter error A USET character set selection parameter value between 1 and 8 274 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 Multinational Character Set Errors was expected Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an alpha character USET substituted character illegal must be 1 of 16 During character substitution in the USET command the hex value for the character being replaced must be one of the specified 16 hex values Only the following hex values Ca can be replaced by another hex value Fa 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E USET defined character illegal must be hex 20 FF During the USET command the hex value for the substituted character Fa must range between 20 and FF hex The value given may be out of bounds USET syntax error END command is expected An END command is expected when the USET character set definition is completed No such CONFIGuration option Left or Top Bottom margin too large for the current page size Not defined 275 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 276 Standard ASCII Character Set B7 B BITS KEY B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX ASCII CHARACTER COLUMN 0 1 m 0 O BEL ooo
156. des UCC EAN 128 uses the same bar code and character set as Code 128 However in UCC EAN 128 the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately follows the start code The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 data structure requires an Application Identifier Al at the beginning of bar code data Each Al determines the format and length of the data which follows Refer to Table 17 for more detail Table 17 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers M A Content Format 00 Serial Shipping Container Code n2 n18 02 Item Num of Goods Within Another Unit 2 14 10 Batch or Lot Number n2 an 20 11 Production Date YYMMDD n2 n6 13 Packaging Date YYMMDD n2 n6 15 Sell By Date Quality YYMMDD n2 n6 17 Expiration Date Safety YYMMDD n2 n6 20 Product Variant n2 n2 21 Serial Number n2 an 20 22 HIBCC Quantity Date Batch and Link n2 an 29 23 Lot Number Transitional Use n3 n 19 240 Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer n3 an 30 250 Secondary Serial Number n3 an 30 30 Quantity 2 8 310 Net Weight Kilograms n4 n6 311 Length or 1st Dimension Meters n4 n6 312 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters n4 n6 313 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters n4 n6 314 Area Square Meters n4 n6 315 Volume Liters n4 n6 316 Volume Cubi
157. ds NORMAL CREATE formname FL DISK cc CREATE formname FL The Special Function Control Code The Create Form mode command enter CREATE The optional debug character to check the program line by line for incorrect parameters and print boundaries using the current page size enter the slash symbol to debug the program No checks are made until the completed program is sent to the IGP for storage when the form is executed by printing the file with the IGP program Then the form name is entered into the directory and the program is evaluated If errors are detected the program will print line by line including the error on the line where the error occurs followed by the error free sections of the form Correct all errors and delete the slash Refer to Solving Program Errors on page 248 Defines the form name of the form being created The form name should be no more than 15 characters in length Refer to page 24 for a list of allowable form name characters If a form is created with the same name as a form already existing in memory the newly created form will replace the existing form All future reference to the form editing executing or deleting the form from the directory must be made using the assigned name The optional forms length parameter to specify the maximum length of the form Form length cannot exceed the physical length of the page Specify the form length in one of th
158. e 128C at SR 35 SC 15 1234567890 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command C128C VSCAN H12 DARK 27 50 Vert Dark C128C H 1 2 at SR 27 SC 50 1234567890 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE 128C 1 Execute the form form count of 1 SC 50 SR 27 I EE T DMSCPEDIUNIEITI RENI IO ACRI TOIA ETRE m See 71 SC 15 NDMEGESERCITTUEINENSGRENUIAR id ELLA LTE LE TS v SR 35 1234567890 Figure 13 Sample Code 128C Bar Codes Chapter 3 Bar Codes 8 The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 14 and described on the following pages SR SC START CODE CENTER CODE POSITION Na Eu i STOP CODE S e i 4 T QUIET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA QUIET Normal I REED FIELD ZONE HEIGHT 1 Seen CHECK DIGIT OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK pd DATA FIELD DIGIT INV HEIGHT LEFT DATA 1 STOP CODE CENTER CODE START CODE i perg 2 or5 1 DIGIT 1 QUIET ADD ON SR SC ZONE CODE POSITION zm a quer l susc zone POSITION 1 CHECK PED cesi OPTIONAL FIELD READABLE CENTER DATA RIGHT FIELD CODE DATA FIELD OPTIONAL CENTER RPADABLE D CODE FIELD auer zone HEIGHT lt HEIGHT gt
159. e POSTNET Bar Code PostBar and Royal Mail KIX PostBar and Royal Mail KIX PostBar and Royal Mail bar codes like POSTNET are used for mailing applications However these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels These bar codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width but have four different types of bars Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker whereas POSTNET only has two bar types Tall and Short The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of four bars using combinations of Full Height Ascender Descender and Trackers It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit except with the KIX format see below PostBar allows you complete flexibility to specify the individual bar types that comprise the signal For PostBar you are responsible for encoding the address adding the start and stop codes and supplying the appropriate check digit Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm border on each side of the bar code Start Stop Code The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code Data Field For PostBar a variable length data field of digits O through 3 are allowed to represent the bars Full Height 0 Ascender 1 Descender 2 and Tracker 3 For Royal Mail the data is restricted to alohanumeric characters through Z and 0 through 9 If
160. e SETUP PTX file on the flash memory is automatically deleted and no IGP PGL SETUP commands are executed upon printer power up Note The SETUP PTX is automatically created by the IGP PGL when the SETUPEND command is received When the SETUP PTX file is not on the flash memory no extra IGP PGL commands are performed on power up 85 Chapter 86 2 Command Codes Special Function Control Code Change Purpose Changes the current Special Function Control Code SFCC Mode NORMAL or EXECUTE Format cc SFCC n or cc SFCC cc The current Special Function Control Code SFCC Specifies the Special Function Control Code change command Enter SFCC the semicolon is required n Represents the ASCII decimal numeric value for the new SFCC Replace n with a decimal value between 0 and 255 n Represents the hexidecimal value for a printable character as the new SFCC Replace with hexidecimal value between 20 and 7F If representing the new SFCC in hexidecimal it must be enclosed in single quotes Comments When the SFCC is changed using the SFCC command the change is effective immediately and the old SFCC is no longer recognized When printer power is turned off and on the SFCC returns to the configuration default The configuration default SFCC can also be re selected by sending the command cc SFCC Example The following example using both the ASCII and hexadecimal values changes the SFCC
161. e When the IGP is in the quiet state P Series line printer emulation commands are active Refer to your LinePrinter Plus Programming Reference Manual for descriptions of these commands Logo Call Purpose Mode Format Selects and positions a previously defined logo The logo itself is actually defined separately in the Create Logo mode The logo is defined using IGP dots CREATE LOGO SR SC logoname DISK STOP LOGO The Logo Call command enter LOGO Example LOGO 56 35 HAND 56 50 HAND 56 65 HAND STOP SR 56 SC 35 SR SC logoname DISK STOP Logo Call Defines the starting row of the logo The SH and SC parameter specifies the location for the logo based on the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was defined Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the logo The SC and SR parameter specifies the location for the logo based on the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was defined Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Identifies a previously defined logo by name for use on the form Enter the logo name exactly as u
162. e a logo first design it in the Create Logo mode then add it to a form in the Create Form mode then execute the form with the logo in the Execute Form mode The following logo exercise includes all three of these steps DOT POSITIONS DOT POSITIONS Row Column Row Column 1 40 42 31 1 36 2 35 42 32 1 39 3 36 42 33 1 58 4 35 42 34 1 58 5 33 41 35 1 58 6 31 40 36 1 58 7 30 38 37 1 58 8 29 36 38 1 57 9 28 35 39 4 24 10 27 34 52 54 40 7 23 11 24 33 48 54 41 8 23 12 22 31 45 54 42 9 23 13 19 30 41 54 43 11 24 14 16 29 38 53 44 12 25 15 13 29 36 51 45 14 27 16 11 29 33 48 46 15 30 17 9 44 47 17 32 18 7 42 48 18 35 19 6 39 49 22 34 20 4 36 50 25 35 21 1 34 51 26 36 22 1 34 52 28 37 23 1 34 53 30 37 24 1 60 54 32 37 25 1 60 55 33 37 26 1 60 56 35 36 27 1 60 28 1 59 29 1 59 30 1 35 Figure 54 Sample Logo Creating a Logo Creating a Logo 1 Use your system commands to open a file for the logo program with the filename HNDLGO FOM For example Enter Format HNDLGO FOM System Format Input the Special Function Control Character and Logo mode command to put the IGP in the Create Logo mode Include HAND as the logo name specify a vertical length VL of 56 column length and a horizontal length HL of 60 row length Enter Format LOGO HAND 56 60 cc LOGO ogoname VL HL Enter each row of dot positions as tabulated from the grid and shown in Figure 54 The format is Row Column for example 15 13 29 36 51
163. e data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BF n L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data PDF417 data field Enter the data for the bar code A null data field no characters is not permitted The data field can contain any character including carriage returns and line feeds The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 1024 bytes to mini
164. e location of the pagination field was not specified in the Create Form mode the page field is printed in the upper left corner of the form FC The optional form count parameter specifies the number of copies of the form to print Enter the appropriate number When the last page prints the IGP returns to the Normal mode automatically Note Do not use the form count parameter if dynamic data AF and parameters incremental data ICNT or IRST parameters overlay data or EVFU data are used in the Execute command ICNTn The optional incremental form count Enter ICNT and the Incremental value as described in the Execute Incremental Dynamic Data command described on page 65 IRSTn The optional incremental reset count parameter Enter IRST and the reset value as described in the Execute Incremental Dynamic Data command described on page 65 59 Chapter 60 2 Command Codes DISK Optional parameter that specifies to recall the form from the flash memory Enter DISK EVFU Data Optional parameter to use the EVFU to overlay data onto the form EVFU Data is not part of the Execute command It is shown in the command sequence to indicate that actual EVFU data can be entered following the Execute command Enter EVFU data as described in Appendix C and on page 61 cc AF n D ASCII text D The Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command Enter the dynamic alphanumeric data during the Execute Form mode as described
165. e n with the number of the field corresponding to when it was defined with the Logo Call command during the CREATE form mode D The printable character identifying the start and finish of the logo name Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the name The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but will not be included in the logo name logoname Enter the logo name If the logo is not found in DRAM the flash memory is searched Comments The logo location must have been previously identified using the GFn parameters of a logo call command in the Create Form mode Then use the appropriate logo command to enter the logo data in that location Inputting individual commands enters new logo data into the identified location each time the form is printed You can repeat the cc GFn D logoname D sequence to complete as many logo fields as were defined on the form in the Create Form mode You can also combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command in the same Execute command sequence Each page of dynamic data the dynamic fields data and overlay data for the form must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a form feed NOTE There are no incremental logos Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data Purpose Incorporates incremental decremental capability to dynamic alphanumeric or bar code data suppl
166. e sensing it enables or disables use of the sensed PI line Mode NORMAL Format cc EN PI or cc DIS PI cc The Special Function Control Code EN PI The Enable PI command enter EN PI When this command is enabled the IGP senses PI line the 8 bits of data are interpreted as a paper instruction command and the PI line itself is ignored DIS PI The Disable command enter DIS PI When the Disable command is sent the 8 bits of data interpreted as printable characters and not as a paper instruction command Print File Purpose Prints files from the flash memory Print File can be used to show the SETUP functions that exist Mode NORMAL Format cc PRINT filename cc The Special Function Control Code PRINT The Print File command enter PRINT filename The filename to be printed Comments Do not use wildcard characters because the Print File command Example PRINT Si will attempt to print any file on the flash Example of how to print setup ptx ETUP PTX Quiet Quiet Purpose Places the IGP in the Quiet mode where all data passed to the ASCII emulation is unaffected by IGP commands except for the LISTEN SFON SFOFF and IGON IGOFF Mode NORMAL Format cc QUIET cc The Special Function Control Code QUIET The Quiet command enter QUIET The IGP remains in the quiet state until the Listen command is received Comments In the Quiet mode IGP ignores all commands except LISTEN SFON SFO
167. e symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm UPS 11 Command Format BARCODE UPS11 DIR MAG Hn m BF n L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE UPS11 Designates bar code type UPS 11 enter UPS11 DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 8 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio Hn m UPS 11 Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the curren
168. eck digit is inserted automatically into the bar code to verify accurate scanning 199 Chapter 3 Bar Codes UPCSHIP Command Format BARCODE UPCSHIP DIR MAG Hn m BFn DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE UPCSHIP Designates bar code type UPCSHIP enter UPCSHIP DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale NOTE If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFn Opti
169. ed if a null data field was specified For German 1 2 5 fields of the data are separated by dots and spaces Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 139 Chapter 3 Bar Codes 2 5 Example Figure 23 illustrates a horizontal and vertical 1 2 5 bar code generated by the following program CREATE 125 Enter Create Form mode BARCODE Bar Code command 1 2 5 49 27 Dark Code I 2 5 at SR 49 SC 27 24688642 Data Field PDF A Upper Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command I 2 5 VSCAN H12 DARK 44 52 Vert Dark I 2 5 H 1 2 at SR 44 SC 52 24688642 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form mode
170. ed on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Enter the characters of the bar code data restricted to exactly 12 digits If the 2 or 5 digit add on data option is used include this data at the end of the data field The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively The first character is interpreted as the number system character The left side of the data field or the lower side on vertically oriented symbols can be encoded in either format A or format B as determined by the value of the number system character A bar code character is not produced for the number system character The number system character is derived from the left side data field encoding The right side of the data field or the upper side on vertically oriented symbols and check digit are PDF LOC FONT STOP EAN 13 always encoded in format C Table 15 defines
171. edure is as follows 1 Design a form determining spacing and channel assignments for each line 2 Sendthe programming sequence to the printer The following information applies when programming and using the EVFU PI Line The PI signal can be detected by the IGP as the 8th data bit in a serial interface or a separate input line in a parallel interface Refer to the EN PI DIS PI command and the PION PIOFF commands on page 79 Elongated Characters Elongated double high characters can be used within EVFU programs The EVFU automatically counts one line of elongated characters as two normal character lines Paper Runaway Protection If the EVFU is selected but not loaded when an EVFU command is sent from the host computer the printer moves the paper a single line feed If the EVFU is selected and the memory is loaded a channel code sent from the host which is not a part of the assigned sequence currently in memory moves the paper a single line feed Line Spacing The printer can use any line spacing with the EVFU The EVFU determines the forms length according to the program specifications and the currently selected line spacing For example 14 inch paper with 10 Ipi line spacing would yield a 140 line form which can be defined by the EVFU Mixing line spacing on the same form unloads the EVFU EVFU Programming Sequence The EVFU provides 16 channels to identify up through 192 lines An error results if the EVFU form length
172. ending column parameter HORiZontal line thickness LT error The thickness of the horizontal line specified by the first parameter in the horizontal line command is incorrect This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero Not defined Vertical Line Errors Vertical Line Errors 10 17 19 VERTical line starting column SC out of bounds The column specified by the second parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the form boundaries VERTical line starting row SR out of bounds The upper starting row of the vertical line specified by the third parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the boundaries of the form VERTical line ending row ER out of bounds The lower ending row of the vertical line specified by the fourth parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line outside the boundaries of the form VERTical line format or delimiter error Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the parameters of the vertical line command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a A missing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon c Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters Insufficient memory to store the VERTical line No more room in the IGP memory exists for another vertical line The rest of the vertical line c
173. ent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning 97 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Code 39 Command Format Although commonly referred to as Code 39 you must enter the command as C3 9 including the slash during IGP input BARCODE C3 9 CD DIR MAG Hn m BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE C3 9 CD Designates bar code type C39 enter C3 9 To calculate and plot the optional mod 43 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnif
174. ermine your maximum print boundaries 83 Chapter 84 2 Command Codes If the dot scale is selected the parameters are specified in dot row and column For example based on a 60 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical dot scale a form of 8 1 2 x 11 inches has 792 rows 72 dpi x 11 inches and 510 columns 60 dpi x 8 1 2 inches and a form of 8 x 11 inches has 792 rows and 480 columns The default scale factor uses character row and column and 10 cpi Anytime CP DP format page 26 is used the scale assumes 6 Ipi and 10 cpi and a 60 x 72 dpi format You can change the scale at any time during forms creation by using either of the Scale commands Elements designed before the scale change will print at the former scale while those elements following the scale change will print at the current scale Note 1 For alphanumeric data the Scale command only affects data position For graphic elements such as lines and boxes the Scale command can also affect line thickness if the horizontal vertical scales are given Select Format Purpose Enables the IGP to ignore all host generated paper movement commands 00 hex Mode NORMAL CREATE or EXECUTE Format cc SFON or cc SFOFF Note A line terminator is not required in the Select Format Sequence cc The Special Function Control Code SFON The Select Format On command Enter SFON SFOFF Exits Select Format Enter SFOFF Comments During Selec
175. erms of dot or character columns based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The offset is from starting row to starting row VDUP OFF Terminates the Vertical Duplication command enter VDUP OFF If not entered the IGP expects another form element to be defined for duplication A single VDUP command can define different types of elements for duplication Example The following example is a vertical duplication of one horizontal line The line is duplicated three times To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page VDUP 3 2 3 duplications with 2 char row spacing HORZ Command to be duplicated vertically 1 52 15 65 5 Terminates the duplicated element command VDUP OFF Terminates the vertical duplication COLUMN 15 SL TS ROW 52 MM ROW 54 _ 56 COLUMN 65 Emulation Switching Emulation Switching Purpose Mode Format To switch the active emulation from PGL to the emulation selected NORMAL cc EMULATION emulation EMULATION The Emulation Switch command emulation Specifies the emulation to activate Currently the only selection is VGL Code V Enter VGL If VGL is not the selection this command is then ignored Comments This command is only
176. es When this occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then processing continues normally 59 Color or GRAY scale not supported with LOGOS Color or gray information was received from the TIFF data but it is not supported with the LOGO command Create Errors 60 Directory full cannot CREATE the form or LOGO The directory is full or no more room exists in the IGP memory for another form When this occurs the IGP automatically reverts to the Normal mode To create space in the IGP memory delete forms that are no longer required 61 CREATE function unrecognized An unrecognizable command is entered during the Create Form mode At this point the buffer is flushed until a Stop command is found and then processing continues 62 CREATE horizontal duplication parameter HDUP error Either a format error was detected or a parameter was exceeded The duplication number must be no greater than 255 and the offset must be no greater than 792 dot scale If this error occurs the Horizontal Duplication command is ignored and forms processing continues 63 CREATE vertical duplication parameter VDUP error Either a format error was detected or a parameter was exceeded The duplication number must be no greater than 255 and the offset must be no greater than the specified length of the form If this error occurs the Vertical Duplication command is ignored and forms processing continues 64 CREATE scale factor para
177. es cc ISET n In the Create mode SFCC not required ISET n cc Represents the Special Function Control Character ISET The Multinational Character Set command enter ISET n The character substitution set number enter a value from Table 21 For example refer to Table 23 If you want to use the User Set 1 created in the example on page 255 call ISET 24 Similarly if you want User Set 5 that you had previously defined call ISET 28 to select and print the User Set 5 substitution set Comments You can issue the ISET command as many times within a form as needed The character set selected will remain active until a new character set is selected If you choose an incorrect character set value or make a syntax error an error message will result If a value for n is not specified an error message will print Using the ISET command in the Execute mode declares the character set for use in conjunction with the dynamic data within that Execute command Fixed form data specified in the Create mode is not affected by an ISET command in the Execute mode The character set selected will remain in effect until another character set is selected Multinational Character Sets Multinational Character Sets IGP PGL MULTINATIONAL Set LL o a lt o 0 e N dd 4 O 5 O 5 gt Q 9 MO G MO 30 0 BOY 0 0 0 im m iZ O O OO O X Go D O 4 Od sal ub am se
178. es 28 Alphanuitrierics ame oe e e teet tete 29 Alphanumerics Incremental Fields 34 Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields 38 Alphanumerics Incremental Dynamic Data Fields 40 BOX6S etes der ite Qa ees A dove S a au 43 Compressed Print Density 45 Gonfig tation au tee itte edited cuts 46 Table of Contents COITIGIS iuis tons Et ee eti Sua abra eese a Sa da 49 eC M 51 Delete TIE 52 Delete eis e DER RU te er e OR eus 53 u EE 53 Duplication 54 Duplication Verticali 56 Emulation Switching tette Cette 57 e E EE rM D x ober 57 Execute Form Mode eec 58 Execute Form General 59 Execute Form Electronic Vertical Format Unit 61 Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data 62 Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code 63 Execute Form Dynamic Logo 64 Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data 65 Execute Form Overlay 67 2 t gu deed
179. ess than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC ora character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters A null data field no characters is permitted The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 10 The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to m
180. essed number 00456 1 Example 275831 the first two digits plus 100 27100 same as above 00583 2 Example 412022 the first two digits plus 200 41200 same as above 00202 3 Example 876543 the first three digits plus 00 87600 000 plus the FOURTH and FIFTH digit 00054 4 Example 753774 the first four digits plus 0 75370 0000 plus the FIFTH digit 00007 5 6 7 8 9 Examples 213756 517019 the first five digits of the zero suppressed number 21375 51701 0000 plus the SIXTH digit 00006 00009 UPC E Example Figure 41 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC E bar code generated by the following program CREAT E UPCE BARCODE UPC E 2 H9 0927400000 D 34 15 522 EXECUTE NORMAL 9 Figure 41 Sample UPC E Bar Code 197 Chapter 3 Bar Codes UPCSHIP The structure for the UPCSHIP bar code is shown in Figure 42 and described on the following pages 71 QUIETI IQUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE A 0 OPTIONAL CHECK 1 DIGIT COW CW I I I I OPTIONAL 1 READABLE i DATA 1 FIELD 1 1 OPTIONAL I CHECK DIGIT UPPER l LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD J GUARD GUARD GUARD BAND ZONE ke HEIGHT HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT
181. exceeds the physical length of the page and the IGP returns to the Normal mode The number of channels in an EVFU overrides the length of the form as it was defined in the CREATE mode therefore the EVFU must be equal to or longer than the form being used The EVFU programming sequence is listed below and explained in the following sections 1 Start load code 2 Line identification codes and 3 Endload code 285 Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU Start Load Code 1E or 6E Hex The Start Load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for channel assignment storage Refer to Table 25 or Table 26 for the appropriate start load code Channel Assignment The EVFU memory has the capacity for 92 line forms The first line identification code channel code in the EVFU load data defines the first line on the form the second line identification code defines the second line on the form etc Each line must have a line identification code A single channel code is used repeatedly throughout a form to reserve blank lines between defined channel codes and to maintain the correct forms length These filler channels can be any channel number except channel code 1 which is reserved for the top of form and channel code 12 which is reserved as the vertical tab channel In the EVFU example which begins on page 289 filler channels are represented by a hex 11 code Calls are rarely made to filler channels because they do not specify a
182. f Contents Page Layout Considerations 2 239 Planning the Form 239 Creating a Form and Adding Form Components 243 Directory 247 eee Ee ete et het 247 Delete Command a 248 Example u asya E iA 248 Solving Program Errors te or tr a 248 Example 5 d niit e eue EE 249 5 Multinational Character Sets 251 Introd ctlon aa hie de det et e e dede 251 Supported Character 251 Character Addresses ente dex una 252 Making Character Substitutions 252 Accessing Characters and Character 253 OCR Character 5 253 Data Bit 8 cu Meee ee etu decedit do tee bus 253 Power Up Character Set Selection 253 User Defined Set Command 254 Character Set Selection Command ISET 256 Multinational Character 257 07 CAREER 261 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes
183. for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD defined on page 89 Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 143 Chapter 3 Bar Codes DARK SR SC D data field 144 b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identif
184. g 1 is the starting value CREATE TEST 288 VDUP 3 6 ALPHA IAF1 5 6 5 4 4 STOP VDUP OFF END EXECUTE TEST 1 00002 45678 RMAL 45678 45680 45682 Boxes Boxes Purpose Mode Format Produces any variety of rectangular boxes CREATE BOX LT SR SC EC STOP BOX LT SR SC ER EC STOP The Box command enter BOX Boxes expand down and to the right from the given row and column Defines the line thickness measured in dots Line thickness is based on dot dimensions of 1 72 inch both horizontally and vertically so that line thickness is equal in both directions Enter a value of 1 or greater Defines the starting row of the box Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the box Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the ending row of the box Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the form The ending row must be greater than the starting row Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the ending c
185. g column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data data field PDF LOC FONT STOP Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 1 2 5 and 14 Interleaved 2 5 Enter the characters for the bar code data null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors An even number of characters are required for the interleaving process Consequently if an odd number of characters are entered in the data field a leading zero is added automatically The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively German 1 2 5 The data field must be 11 or 13 digits exactly ITF 14 The data field must be 13 digits exactly Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data is not printed This parameter is not allow
186. han the number of characters in the STEPMASK field If the number of data characters in the Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command is less than the number used in STEPMASK the data will print right justified with preceding spaces Leading spaces are not provided for bar code data For dynamic bar code data the type of characters allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type of bar code Refer to the individual bar code descriptions in the Bar Codes chapter for information on valid type and quantity of data characters The STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard printable character delimiters just as a standard data field is enclosed within delimiters Execute Form Overlay Data Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered onto a predefined form The form is completed by positioning the data in the exact location it will appear on the form when printed The data is placed horizontally using tabs and spaces and vertically using line feeds form feeds and the Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU For example if the serial number field on the form begins at character row 22 and column 14 enter 22 line feeds space over 14 columns and input serial number overlay data An entire form can be completed with a page of overlay data in this manner Overlay data at the end of a form is printed on a new form until all overlay data is used Then to advance to the next form use a form feed The IGP EVFU can be used to contr
187. he Create command as described in the Error Codes chapter Print the file with the IGP program The debug parameter lists the program line by line including the error on the line where the error occurs followed by the error free sections of the form Correct the error and print the file again When the error has been corrected delete the debug parameter Example Assume you made two errors in the Box and Corner commands input in steps 3 and 4 of the Form and Bar Code Example on page 229 Using the debug parameter in the Create command produces the following sample listing SFCC CREATE PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 ERROR 24 BOX format or delimiter error input parameters STOP CORNER 3 300 13 57 64 5 7 ERROR 35 CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds ERROR 31 CORNER starting row SR out of bounds ERROR 39 CORNER starting row SR ending row ER STOP END From the description of the error messages and the incorrect line identified by the error message the errors are easily located and corrected Notice a colon was accidentally input in the Box command where a semicolon was required error number 24 PRACTICE BOX 2 35 16 53 61 ERROR 24 BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters STOP In the Corner command the starting row was too large This single input error caused the vertical length of the corner to extend beyond the form boundaries error number 35 the starting row to
188. he EVFU load sequence When the EVFU memory is cleared the forms length returns to the previously Set value 288 EVFU Example EVFU Example The following EVFU example is a 2 inch form at 6 Ipi line spacing Thus 12 lines on the form must be defined The form is repeated 3 times Paper instructions are disabled Assign Line Identification Codes Line ID Code Description Assigned Hex Code Start Load Start EVFU 1E Line 1 Top of Form 10 Line 2 Filler 11 Line 3 Filler 11 Line 4 Filler 11 Line 5 Vertical Tab 1B Line 6 First channel stop 13 Line 7 Filler 11 Line 8 Filler 11 Line 9 Second channel stop 12 Line 10 Filler 11 Line 11 Third channel stop 15 Line 12 Filler 11 Stop Load End EVFU 1F EVFU Format in Execute Mode The Execute command shown on the next page derived from the Execute command format on page 59 illustrates how the EVFU data above is incorporated into the Execute command All other Execute command parameters are shown in italics Optional parameters are shown in brackets Figure 58 on page 291 illustrates the printed output from this data The boldface line below the EXECUTE command represents the hexadecimal EVFU load sequence which identifies the channel codes at which overlay data will be placed on each form The example hex values correspond to the line identification codes listed above Channel codes not described above as Filler channels are assigned unique hex codes Calls to these channels will
189. he following sets of criteria must be met 1 The PI line must be enabled and set high 2 Bits 7 and 6 can be set to 1 or 0 and 286 Using the EVFU 3 Data bit 5 must be 0 not set OR 1 The PI line must be disabled or low 2 Bits 7 and 6 must be 0 not set and 3 Data bit 5 must be 1 set Given these conditions the lower four bits of a byte specify the EVFU channel number Table 25 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes when the PI line is enabled Table 26 lists the EVFU channel and their equivalent data bytes when the PI line is disabled Table 25 EVFU Codes PI Line Enabled ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec Code 00 NUL 01 SOH 02 STX 03 ETX 04 EOT 05 ENQ 06 ACK EM EM EM EM 1 1 BERE 07 BEL EUM 1 1 EM EM EM A xx x x x x x O 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 gt CO OO BR CO Po gt 08 BS 09 HT 0A LF 0B VT 0C FF 0D CR SO 5 19 o lt gt lt gt lt gt EU e N 12 VT aje o 16 Start Load End Load gt 2 2 jojojojo 2 2 2 oljolol olcd 1 0 1 0
190. he form 94 BARCODE starting column SC out of bounds The starting column parameter in the bar code command will cause the bar code symbol to print either beyond the left margin or the right margin of the form 95 BARCODE height Hn out of bounds must be 3 through 99 The height parameter specified in the bar code command is out of bounds Acceptable values are 3 through 99 96 BARCODE data field has illegal character format A character in the data field was not recognized as an acceptable character Refer to the applicable section in the Bar Codes chapter to determine the acceptable characters for the bar code symbol being used The missing ending delimiter also causes this error 97 BARCODE data field too short or too long The data field in the bar code command has too few or too many data characters Refer to the applicable section in the Bar Codes chapter to determine the acceptable number of data characters for the bar code symbol being used 98 BARCODE symbol s exceeds the form length The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print below the limits of the form This error occurs on the data field line of the bar code 99 BARCODE symbol s exceeds the form width The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print beyond the right margin This error occurs on the data field line of the bar code 100 BARCODE variable ratio 0 or not ascending For user defined variable bar code ratios either one of the ratios is zero
191. he printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress printing the data field and the trailing lower portions of the EAN bar code Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results STOP EAN 8 Example Figure 15 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 8 bar code generated by the following program CREATE EAN8 BARCODE EAN8 2 H9 DARK 33 15 Enter Create Form mode Bar Code command Dark Code EAN 8 2 digit add on H 0 9 SR 33 SC 15 123456722 Data Field plus 2 digit add on Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command EAN8 2 VSCAN H10 DARK 33 55 Vertical Dark EAN 8 2 digit add on H 1 0 SR 33 SC 55 123456722 Data Field plus 2 digit add on Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE EAN8 1 Execute the form form count of 1
192. ication Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD defined on page 89 Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments plus dots enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 to 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 98 DARK SR SC D data field PDF LOC Code 39 b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be l
193. ied as a part of the Execute Form mode Mode NORMAL Note In the command below incremental execute parameters are shown in boldface type standard execute command parameters are shown in italics The general execute format is shown on page 59 Format cc EXECUTE formname PAGE n 1 IRST n ICNTn Identifies the incremental form count to specify the number of forms to generate with the incremental fields automatically updated Enter ICNT and replace n with a value ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the number of forms IRSTn The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of forms to generate before resetting all incremental fields to their starting values The reset count parameter is useful in dividing the total number of forms generated into multiple groups of identical copies To use this parameter enter IRST and replace n with a value ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the reset count how many forms generated before resetting the incremental fields If the reset count value is equal to or greater than the incremental count value the reset will never occur Example The following forms were generated from ICNT6 IRST2 To duplicate incremental fields within a form refer to page 40 0 3 0 3 0 3 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 5 form1 form2 form3 form4 form5 form6 ICNT6 65 Chapter 66 2 Command Codes Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields I
194. if this parameter is used Optional parameter that specifies the number of rows the symbol will have Enter R followed by the number of rows in the range of 3 through 90 in multiples of 3 Parameters Hn Wn Cn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used Optional parameter that specifies the number of columns the symbol will have Enter C followed by the number of columns in the range of 1 through 90 Parameters Hn Wn Rn or ASPECT cannot be entered if this parameter is used 155 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Sn BFn L DARK SR SC D 156 Optional parameter that specifies the security level Enter S followed by the security level in the range of 0 through 8 The default is 2 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be less than L d The information for th
195. ify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n 104 DARK SR SC D data field PDF LOC Code 93 c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field
196. in Execute Form Dynamic Alphanumeric Data on page 62 cc BFn D data D The Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command Enter the dynamic bar code data during the Execute Form mode as described in Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 cc GF m D logoname D The Execute Dynamic Logo Command Enter the name of the logo during the Execute Form mode as described in Execute Form Dynamic Logo on page 64 cc AF STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D The Execute Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command Supply the data as described on page 66 cc IBFE n idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTm D STARTDATA D The Execute Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data command Supply the data as described on page 66 Overlay Data Overlay data can be entered during the Execute Form mode The words Overlay Data are not part of the Execute command They are shown in the command sequence to indicate that actual overlay data can be entered following the Execute command Refer to Execute Form Overlay Data on page 67 Form Feed Character Optional command instructing the IGP to start a new page with new EVFU dynamic and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the current form Using this EVFU Data Dynamic Data and Overlay Data Form Feed Character sequence can be repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum print speed within the original Execute command Execute Form Electronic Vertical Format Unit
197. in Figure 22 and described on the following pages QuiETI QUIETI SR SC SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE r I 1 1 OPTIONAL 1 1 CCW CW I I I I I OPTIONAL I READABLE I DATA FIELD 1 OPTIONAL I DIGIT UPPER LOWER LOWER i UPPER GUARD j GUARD GUARD J GUARD BAND I I BAND BAND BAND 1 ZONE HEIGHT 9 HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC pan POSITION 9 1 1 UPPER GUARD BAND I r RE QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal cone o ommo ZONE HEIGHT _ 4 LOWER GUARD BAND L OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION r OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD nu 71 LOWER GUARD BAND I 7 HEIGHT INV j QUIET STOP DATA FIELD START QUIET ZONE CODE CODE ZONE gt UPPER GUARD BAND OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT cene enc J Figure 22 Interleaved 2 5 German 1 2 5 and ITF 14 Structure 135 Chapter 136 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes
198. incrementing Printed Results 123 BPT 1 ABD124 m RPT 0 ABI129 ABJ120 210 Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command is a variation of the standard IGP bar code commands Use this command with the appropriate parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic incrementing of fixed bar code data fields is required The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command format is shown and defined below Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface type standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are shown in italics BARCODE type VSCAN MAG 1 DARK SR SC idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D PDF LOC FONTI STOP idir STEPMASK RPTn RSTn Identifies this bar code command as Incremental Bar Code command enter I The optional increment direction parameter to specify an increment add or decrement subtract to the data Enter a plus sign or leave the field blank to increment the default Enter a minus sign to decrement Defines the increment amount step number of character positions in the data field and provides a mask to control the increment function on specific parts of the data Refer to Incrementing Bar Code Data on page 208 for complete information on STEPMASK parameter values The optional increme
199. information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used Refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data Enter the data for the bar code A null data field no characters is permitted Whenever a string of 4 or more contiguous numeric digits are detected the IGP PGL automatically inserts a Code C at the start of the numeric string and outputs numeric digit pairs packed into single bar code ch
200. inimize potential reading errors Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code 99 100 Chapter 3 Codes To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X for OCR B font enter N for 10 cpi enter P for 12 cpi enter Q for 13 cpi enter R for 15 cpi enter T for 17 cpi enter V for 20 cpi STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Table 10 Code 39 Character Set ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 NUL U SP Space V SOH A A A A a A STX B b C C C G EOT D D D d D ENQ E 96 E ACK F amp F F F f F BEL G i G G G g G BS H H H H h H HT 1 l l i I LF J B J J J j J VT K IK K K k K FF L L L L L CR M M M m M SO N i N
201. ion Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 411 Bill To Invoice To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 412 Purchase From Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are n3 n13 Purchased 413 Ship For UCC EAN Location Code n3 n13 414 EAN Location Code For Physical Identification n3 n13 420 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority n3 an 20 421 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code With 3 Digit ISO Country Code Prefix n3 n3 an 9 8001 Roll Products Width Length Core Diameter Direction and Splices 4 14 8003 UPC EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset 4 14 16 8004 UCC EAN Serial Identification n4 an 30 8005 Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure 4 6 8006 Component of an Article n4 n14 n2 n2 8018 Service Relation Number n4 n18 8100 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character and Offer n4 n1 n5 8101 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character Offer and End of Offer n4 n1 n5 n4 8102 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character Preceded by Zero n4 ni n1 90 Mutually Agreed Between Trading Partners n2 an 30 91 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 92 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 93 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 94 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 95 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 96 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 97 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 98 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 99 Internal n2 an 30 176 To indicate only year and month DD must be filled with 00
202. irectory command enter DIRECTORY DISK Optional parameter to specify the forms and logos stored on the flash memory Enter DISK Comments As many forms and logos as printer memory allows may be stored in IGP memory If the memory is full the form will not print available space in the memory must be at least the size of the form being executed For more information refer to the Directory Example on page 247 53 Chapter 54 2 Command Codes Duplication Horizontal Purpose Mode Format Defines both the number of times form elements are duplicated horizontally and the spacing between each duplication CREATE dup offset elements to be duplicated HDUP OFF HDUP dup offset HDUP OFF The Horizontal Duplication command enter HDUP Specifies number of times the entered form element s will repeat horizontally Enter a value ranging from 1 through 512 Specifies the horizontal offset to establish the horizontal spacing between each duplication of the form element s specified in the body of the command Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The offset is from starting column to starting column Terminates the Horizontal Duplication command enter HDUP OFF If not entered the IGP expects another form element to be defined for duplication A single HDUP command can define different types of elements fo
203. ith these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n 169 Chapter 3 Bar Codes DARK SR SC D data field PDF LOC 170 c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 89 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the fo
204. ive Each set of five bars comprised of two tall bars and three short bars represents one of the five digits of the zip code plus the four digit zip code extension If the Advanced Bar Code is used an additional two digit code is also added to make an 11 digit data field Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Each bar height is either a tall full or short half bar representing a 1 or 0 respectively Each tall bar must be 125 inch 010 inch each short bar must be 050 inch 010 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is 0 0416 inch and 050 inch respectively with a clear vertical space ranging from 0 012 inch to 0 040 inch between bars Check Digit The sixth tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character for the 5 9 or 11 digit data field respectively The check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning POSTNET POSTNET Command Format BARCODE POSTNET DIR BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE POSTNET DIR BFn L DARK SR Designates bar code type POSTNET enter POSTNET Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If D R is not
205. ker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data data field PDF LOC FONT STOP MSI Enter the characters for the bar code data A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however a maximum of 14 data characters are allowed if a one character check digit field is specified a maximum of 13 data characters are allowed if a two character check digit field is specified The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not u
206. le 289 296 General programming information 285 memory clearing 288 programming sequence See EVFU 285 start load code 286 Examples auto increment fields 225 Create Logo 236 directory 247 dynamic data 218 EVFU 289 forms 215 logo grid 281 PostBar 166 Royal Mail 166 standard grid 279 UCC EAN 128 182 Execute 59 Dynamic Alphanumerics 60 62 Dynamic Bar Codes 60 63 Dynamic Logo 60 Incremental Dynamic Alphanumerics 60 Incremental Dynamic Bar Codes 60 Overlay Data 60 67 Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data 62 Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data 63 Execute Dynamic Logo 64 Execute Errors 269 Execute Form dynamic alphanumeric data 62 dynamic bar code data 63 Dynamic Logo 64 EVFU 61 general format 59 incremental dynamic data 65 overlay data 67 Execute Form Mode 20 58 234 EVFU 60 Execute Form Mode Commands 21 Execute Incremental Dynamic Data 65 Execute Overlay Data 67 Expanded Print 68 Extended Character Sets 251 ISET command 256 ICNT Parameter 59 65 F idir parameter 38 66 Ignore Sequence Command IGON IGOFF 71 Features IGON IGOFF Command 71 alphanumeric data 14 IGP graphic capabilities 14 IGP PGL emulation 13 incremental data 22 FIM 129 command format 131 example 133 structure 129 Fixed Alphanumeric Data 27 Font Command 69 Form Count 59 Form Design 239 Form Examples create basic form 215 Form feed paper motion using 283 modes 15 operation 14 Increment
207. lly incrementing decrementing AIAG labels with alphanumeric and bar code data The printed output of this program is shown on page 227 CREATE AIAG BOX 1 31 2 1 55 2 66 5 STOP HORZ 1 38 5 1 66 5 1 44 9 1 40 1 49 10 1 40 TOP ERT 26 38 5 44 9 40 44 9 55 2 LPHA 15 31 8 2 0 0 PART NO 1555320725070 P 34 3 9 4 4 00000000002 A0000000002 5 38 9 2 0 0 QUANTITY 5599967250505 OVX 0 5 8 4 4 100 5 41 9 28 0 0 SPECIAL 5 42 6 28 0 0 C 43 9 34 4 4 00002 A20UF 15 45 2 0 0 SUPPLIER 1524510720 My 5 7 1 2 2 040898755 WoO a P O OQ ti O O gt O O 4 O O gt G r gt 9 0 15 50 4 2 20 0 SERIAL 15 51 2 2 0 0 S 0 8 7 2 2 0002110 15 54 5 4 0 0 ACME MOTOR INC IRVINE CA 92713 714 863 1900 TOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 1 DARK 34 7 5 5 X000000002 A000000002 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 40 9 5 5 Q100 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 I DARK 38 1 33 X00002 CA20UF STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 45 11 5 5 V040898755 STOP BARCODE C3 9 H7 DARK 50 9 5 5 50002110 STOP BOX 174 2515 25 2 0645 STOP HORZ 1 8 4 1 66 5 225 Chapter 4 Form Examples 1 14 9 1 40 1 19 6 1 40 STOP VERT 1 26 8 4 14 9 1 40 14 9 25 2 STOP ALPHA C15 1 8 2 0 0 PART NO C15 2 6 2 0 0 1 4 3 9 4 4 00000000002 A0000000001 C15 8 9 2 0 0 QU
208. lue is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BF n L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters DARK Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information 93 Chapter 3 Bar Codes SR SC D data field PDF LOC FONT STOP 94
209. mal mode To create space in IGP memory delete forms with logo elements including the logos that are no longer required LOGO format or delimiter error Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the Logo command If this occurs while specifying the size and name of the logo the IGP reverts to the Normal mode If this occurs during the actual construction of the logo the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then logo construction continues normally LOGO call not previously defined An attempt was made in the Create Form mode to incorporate an undefined logo into a form This error is not generated during the Logo Form mode When this error occurs the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then forms creation continues normally 267 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes 56 Insufficient memory for another LOGO call IGP memory cannot store another logo call To create space in the IGP memory delete forms with logo elements including the logos no longer required 57 LOGO call starting row SR out of bounds During form creation the parameter specifying the row position of a logo places the logo outside the form boundaries The buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found and then processing continues normally 58 LOGO call starting column SC out of bounds During form creation the parameter specifying the column position of a logo places the logo outside the form boundari
210. mand enter STOP and the IGP will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP will wait for another set of Alphanumeric command parameters 31 Chapter 2 Command Codes Comments As dynamic data the location of the alphanumeric field is established in the Create Form mode and the actual alphanumeric data is continuously redefined before placement on the form in the Execute Form mode You can also rotate and reverse print the alphanumeric string using this command Example The following program and example in Figure 4 illustrates the Alphanumeric command capabilities To illustrate positioning starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page Notice the same starting row is used for all EXAMPLE characters and they are all aligned on the same baseline or bottom regardless of expanded or compressed parameters The string rotates around the point of intersection of the starting row and columns shown by the pinwheel E A rotated 10 cpi character establishes the baseline for all character sizes 36 44 2 36 46 1 1 M C13 36 47 0 0 P C15 36 48 0 0 L C17 36 49 0 0 E CW 36 60 2 2 CLOCK CW 42 60 4 4 FWISE CCW 58 26 2 3 COUNTER CCW 45 26 2 2 CLOCK CCW 39 2 26 1 1 WISE INV 54 5 58 0 0 XINVERTED R INV 54 5 49 0 0 REVERSE PRINT 45 48 0 0 CW UC 45 48 0 0 CCW 45 48 0 0
211. mand while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results UPCSHIP Example CREATE UPCSHIP Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command UPCSHIP H12 9 8 UPCSHIP Bar Code height 1 2 inches at SR 9 SC 8 0014154401171 Data Field PDF Print Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command UPCSHIP VSCAN 3 45 Vertical UPCSHIP Bar Code at SR 3 SC 45 1141281029432 Data Field PDF A Print Data Field above the bar code STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE UPCSHIP 1 Execute the form form count of 1 SC 45 E SR3 SC 8 SR9 Q O1 41544 01171 E il 14 12810 29432 0 Figure 43 Sample UPCSHIP Bar Codes 202 UPS 11 UPS 11 The UPS 11 structure is shown in Figure 44 and described on the following pages r 71 71 QUIETI IQUIETI SR SR SC POSITION ZONE POSITION ZONE 0 OPTIONAL CHECK e I DIGIT l CCW CW I I I 1 OPTIONAL i READABLE I 1 DATA i I FIELD 1 OPTIONAL 7 CHECK I DIGIT UPPER LOWER LOWER i UPPER GUARD GUARD GUARD I 47 GUARD BAND BAND BAND BAND ZONE HEIGHT 9 HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT r A SR SC POSITION
212. mask to control the increment function on specific parts of the data Refer to Incremental Bar Code Fields on page 208 or Alphanumerics Incremental Fields on page 34 for complete information on STEPMASK parameter values The optional incremental repeat count parameter to specify the number of times a particular field value is repeated before it is incremented A repeated field value is useful when printing multiple rows columns of identical labels before incrementing to the next value To use the repeat count parameter enter RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the repeat count The default repeat count parameter is 1 which will increment the field value each time it is printed Execute Form Overlay Data RSTn The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed on one or more forms before it is reset to the starting value A reset count is useful when printing a hierarchy of fields where a low level field generates a sequence of numbers is reset and the next higher field level is incremented such as in a unit box carton application To use the reset count parameter enter RST and replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the reset count The default reset count value is 0 STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters must be equal to or less t
213. me Form Sire Logos PRACTICE frm 2172 HCBOATS frm 2560 HANDCRFT 190 LEFTHAND frm 380 HANDCRFT 190 TEST frm 380 UPCA frm 908 POSTNET frm 859 MSI frm 686 I25 frm 648 C128C frm 654 EANG frm 788 C128B frm 732 C39 frm 728 BOX frm 380 AIAG frm 5260 Logos on File Memory Used HANDCRFT 140 856 Forms Memory 0 17135 bytes Logo Memory 836 bytes Total Memory 0 17991 bytes Dynamic Memory Available 834336 bytes 247 Chapter 4 Delete Command Delete Command The Delete command deletes any individual form or logo from the IGP memory according to your specifications The deletion of a form includes its directory entry and any alphanumeric or vector information associated with it The Delete command is used only when the IGP is in the Normal mode Deletion of a logo includes its directory entry and its data in the logo storage area Deletion of a valid logo which is still combined with a form will not cause an error at the time it is deleted however an error will occur if you execute a form that contains a previously deleted logo Example From the directory printed in the preceding section delete the practice form the HandCraft Logo and the HandCraft Boats form Similar to the format used with other command sequences the procedure is as follows open a file input the commands exit the file and print For example Enter Format DELET
214. message Uppercase The IGP PGL is case sensitive ALL commands must be entered in uppercase Inline Commands The SFCC usually a tilde is suggested to be the first character on a new line It may appear anywhere on the command line There is a configuration option that determines whether any data preceding a command is printed or is ignored 23 Chapter 2 IGP Command Standards All IGP commands begin with the Special Function Control Code SFCC and must end with a line terminator Line Terminator Each command line must be terminated by a line feed or a carriage return with a line feed or a paper motion command The command line will not be accepted if not properly terminated Refer to the system controls for your System keyboard and printer configuration codes to determine which key s such as ENTER LINE FEED FORM FEED etc perform a line feed carriage return with line feed or form feed function Printable Character To print alphanumeric and bar code data must be enclosed by a printable character a delimiter This delimiter is represented by D in the command format In this manual an asterisk is used in most examples as the printable character The parentheses are not entered Any printable character can be used as this delimiter except a slash or the SFCC The same printable character must be used at both the beginning and end of the text to be printed and can not be used within the te
215. meter SCALE invalid Either a format error was detected or a parameter was specified incorrectly The vertical lines per inch can be specified as follows 6 8 9 or 10 The horizontal characters per inch can be specified only as 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 cpi If this error occurs the Scale command is ignored and forms processing continues 268 65 66 67 68 69 Execute Errors CREATE page starting row PAGE SR out of bounds When you specify the position of the page parameters with the Page command in the Create Form mode the row position specified will place the page number above or below the boundaries of the form When this error occurs the IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode CREATE page starting column PAGE SC out of bounds When you specify the position of the page parameters in the Create command the column position specified will place the page number outside the form boundaries When this error occurs the IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode CREATE STOP command missing This error occurs when the IGP receives a new function command an End command or a mode command without receiving a Stop command The IGP will continue to process subsequent commands correctly Insufficient memory to store the SETUP program No more room in the IGP PGL memory exists for storing the SETUP routine Insufficient memory to store the form The directory is full or no more room exists in the IGP memory for
216. mize potential reading errors Note New lines i e carriage returns line feeds are allowed in the PDF417 data field and as PDF417 dynamic data field input STOP Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results PDF417 Example Figure 29 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 bar code generated by the following program CREATE PDF417 BARCODE PDF417 X1 Y3 S50 D 37 21 ACME MOTOR COMPANY SUPPORTS PRINTING OF PDF417 TWO DIMENSIONAL BAR CODE SYMBOLOGY 123456789012345678901234567890123456789 STOP END EXECUTE PDF417 NORMAL Figure 29 Sample PDF417 Bar Codes 157 Chapter 3 Bar Codes 158 POSTNET The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 30 and Figure 31 and described on the following pages The POSTNET code can be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4 inch area across the length of the mail piece Return Address Area Postage Area ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA SR SC POSITION rds nr Edd E ae 1 QUIET ZONE 1 1 1 I QUIET QUIET 1 START BAR CODE DATA FIELD STOP ZONE CODE CODE 12908221 QUIET ZONE CHECK DIGIT NOTE Illustration is not to scale Figure 30 POSTNET Structure Note Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Po
217. mmand E EXECUTE FIMB 1 SC PRINTRONIX INC ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE BOX 19559 IRVINE CA 92714 9559 Figure 20 Sample FIMB Bar Code 133 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Figure 21 illustrates a horizontal FIMC bar code generated by the following program and bears the preprinted POSTNET bar code CREATE FIMC Enter Create Form Mode ALPHA Alpha command 23 11 0 0 PRINTRONIX INC 25 11 0 0 ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE ZU RLELPOROSSPZIO BOX 19559 29 11 0 0 IRVINE 92714 9559 STOP Ends Alpha command BARCODE Bar Code command FIM DARK 17 25 Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 17 SC 25 KCE Data field selecting FIMC Bar Code STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command POSTNET DARK 33 3 15 Dark POSTNET Bar Code at SR 33 3 SC 15 927149559 POSTNET data field STOP Ends POSTNET Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE FIMC 1 Executes the form form count of 1 5 25 PRINTRONIX INC ATTN CUSTOMER SERVICE BOX 19559 IRVINE CA 92714 9559 SC 15 SR 33 3 gt Figure 21 Sample Bar Code 134 Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 1 2 5 and 14 Interleaved 2 5 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 The Interleaved 2 5 German 2 5 and ITF 14 bar code structure is shown
218. mmands can be entered delete the form count parameter from the existing Execute command line the 1 at the end of the Execute command line shown on the program on page 218 The Form Count parameter cannot be used when data is supplied dynamically The Execute command line should now read EXECUTE SAMPLE and must be correctly terminated This is the Execute command for the first page of dynamic data ALPHA Begin alpha command for dynamic data AF1 20 10 8 12 0 0 AFl the first line of upper left TO area AF2 20 11 8 12 0 0 AF2 second line of upper left TO area AF3 20 12 8 12 0 0 AF3 third line of upper left TO area AF4 20 10 8 49 0 0 AF4 first line of lower left TO area AF5 20 11 8 49 0 0 AF5 second line of lower left TO area AF6 20 12 8 49 0 0 AF6 third line of lower left TO area STOP Stop the alphanumerics command 221 Chapter 4 Form Examples Dynamic Alphanumeric and Bar Code Data Enter the dynamic data following the Execute command These dynamic data commands will supply the variable data to the bar code and alphanumeric fields previously identified in the Create Form mode After entering the data exit the file if necessary with your system and print The completed form is shown in Figure 48 CREATE SAMPLE 390 HDUP 2 37 BOX 293 599 30735 STOP HORZ Le 4 259935 Led 9 Se Qe 35 1 5 241 52 0 45 35 STOP CORNER 25571129 3371 252 25950711 13 0723 14 2 2 STOP ALPHA 4
219. mn is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data It will not print with the data Use the same character at both ends of the data field Enter the characters for the bar code data restricted to exactly 11 digits If the 2 or 5 digit add on data option is used include this data at the end of the data field The first digit is interpreted as the number system character The remaining 10 digits are the data field characters The characters available for the data field and number system are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively PDF LOC FONT STOP UPC A Optional parameter which affects printing of the human readable data field The data field will print automatically unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter UPC A human readable fields can be printed above or below the bar code symbol If the PDF command is not entered in the UPC A command format the data field automatically prints in OCR B Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar
220. mple assume you work for the HandCraft Boat Company Your slogan is Quality boats crafted by hand and the owner Mr Handcraft has asked you to design a simple form that his salespeople can use for special orders On the form he wants a logo the slogan the customer s name spaces for other particulars of the order and a bar code to distinguish the sales region and boat division from other HandCraft enterprises Begin this task as described below 1 First design the form on the Standard Grid provided in Appendix B Figure 55 shows the locations of the various form components Compensate for expanded characters and plan for the logo 2 Define the logo and then return to the form to add all the form components Modify the hand logo already on file as the HandCraft logo Use the Logo Grid in Appendix B and refer to Figure 56 on page 242 which shows the dot positions of the hand logo with a boat added to the hand When dot positions or a range of dot positions are not specified the boat image in the hand emerges 3 Open a file named HNDCFT FOM to contain all the form information As shown in the following example use the Create Logo mode command name the logo HANDCRFT specify the logo height VL and width HL enter the dot positions used and end the Logo command Enter Format HNDCFT FOM System Format LOGO HANDCRFT 56 60 cc LOGO logoname VL HL 1 40 42 row dot dot1 dot2 dot 2 38 42 3 36 42 4 35 42 5 33 41 6 31
221. n column 13 to avoid overlap Specify 13 2 CP 13 DP 2 for the starting column of the alphanumeric string Similarly to place a horizontal line 8 dot rows beneath another horizontal line in character row position 11 specify row 11 for one line and row 11 8 for the other line 12 5 18 1 18 3 18 5 14 1 11 0 12 0 13 0 14 0 15 0 12 4 13 0 13 2 18 4 14 0 Figure 2 CP DP Format Example 26 Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data Command Codes Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data Based on the requirements of a specific application three methods are used to print alphanumeric data on the form fixed or prepositioned data overlay data and dynamic data Fixed Data Fixed data is entered during the Create Form mode as part of the form definition It appears as prepositioned information similar to other form elements The fixed data is printed on each form in the same location and can only be changed by changing the form definition Your company name address logo or phone number are typical examples of alphanumeric data that can be fixed onto the form Overlay Data Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered during the Execute Form mode by positioning the information with line feeds and spaces into an exact location In general a page of data is overlayed onto a form similar to typing data in the appropriate blanks of a preprinted form Each page of overlay data is separated by f
222. n command enter IGON IGOFF Exits Ignore Sequence enter IGOFF Comments IGON and IGOFF can also be used anywhere in the data stream Line Spacing Purpose Defines the lines per inch printing format Mode NORMAL EXECUTE Format cc LPI n cc The Special Function Control Code LPI The Vertical Line Spacing command enter LPI n Selects the line spacing in enter 6 8 9 10 Comments Standard line spacing is 6 After a Vertical Line Spacing Example 1 9 command is entered all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified Ipi until another Vertical Line Spacing command a Normal Mode command or a Reset command is entered The following command selects 9 printing format until another Line Spacing command a Normal Mode command or a Reset command is entered 71 Chapter 2 Command Codes Lines Horizontal Purpose Defines horizontal lines Mode CREATE Format HORZ LT R SC EC STOP HORZ The Horizontal Line command enter HORZ LT Defines the line thickness measured in 1 72 inch dots Enter a value of 1 or greater Horizontal line thickness expands downward from the given row H Defines the row to draw the horizontal line Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 SC Defines the starting column of the horizontal li
223. n the form Paper Paper Purpose Controls printer paper options Mode NORMAL EXECUTE Format cc PAPER option cc PAPER EJECT The Special Function Control Code The PAPER command enter PAPER Prints all pages that are in the buffer Enter EJECT This is currently the only PAPER command available for line matrix printers Paper Instruction Data Bit 8 Purpose Mode Format Enables or disables data bit 8 as the paper instruction signal when the IGP is configured for a serial interface This command has no effect on a parallel interface NORMAL cc PION or cc PIOFF cc PION PIOFF The Special Function Control Code The Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction On command enter PION When this command is sent 7 data bits are allowed data bit 8 is enabled as the paper instruction When data bit 8 is set high the PION command slews paper When data bit 8 is set low the PION command prints data characters The Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction Off command enter PIOFF When this command is sent 8 data bits are allowed for character data because data bit 8 is disabled as the paper instruction Subsequent occurrences of data bit 8 in the data stream cause printing from the extended character set 79 Chapter 80 2 Command Codes Paper Instruction PI Enable Disable Purpose Enables or disables use of the PI line using a parallel I O device This command does not enable disable PI lin
224. n4 n6 345 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 346 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 347 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 348 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 349 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 350 Area Square Inches n4 n6 351 Area Square Feet n4 n6 352 Area Square Yards n4 n6 353 Area Square Inches Logistics n4 n6 354 Area Square Feet Logistics n4 n6 355 Area Square Yards Logistics n4 n6 356 Net Weight Troy Ounce n4 n6 357 Net Volume Ounces n4 n6 360 Volume Quarts n4 n6 361 Volume Gallons n4 n6 362 Gross Volume Quarts n4 n6 363 Gross Volume Gallons n4 n6 364 Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 365 Volume Cubic Feet n4 n6 366 Volume Cubic Yards n4 n6 367 Gross Volume Cubic Inches 4 6 368 Gross Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 175 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Table 17 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued lq nilai Al Content Format 369 Gross Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 37 Quantity of Units Contained For Use With Al 02 Only n2 n 8 400 Customer s Purchase Order Number n3 an 30 401 Consignment Number n3 an 30 410 Ship To Deliver To Locat
225. namic Bar Code BFn Executes the dynamic bar code data provided after the cc 63 Data EXECUTE command Expanded Print EXPAND Expands fonts vertically and horizontally 68 Font FONT Selects a specific typeface bold slant italic factor and 69 symbol set Ignore Sequence IGON Enables the IGP to ignore all characters after the Ignore 71 On Off IGOFF Sequence On command is sent until the Ignore Sequence Off command is sent Incremental IAFn Executes the incremental dynamic alphanumeric data provided 65 Alphanumeric after the cc EXECUTE command Dynamic Data Incremental Bar IBFn Executes the incremental dynamic bar code data provided 65 Code Dynamic Data after the cc EXECUTE command Line Spacing LPI Defines the lines per inch printing format 71 Vertical Multinational ISET Selects one of the multinational or international character sets Chap 5 Character Set Normal Mode NORMAL Places the IGP in the Normal Mode where it does not change 78 the data stream but awaits the SFCC followed by an IGP command Reset RESET Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP memory 82 Select Format SFON Ignores all host generated paper movement commands See 84 On Off SFOFF note on page 20 SFCC SFCC Changes the current Special Function Control Code SFCC 86 21 Chapter 22 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Alphanumeric Data Based on the requirements of a specific application you can use one of three methods to print alphanumeric data
226. ncremental dynamic data fields are created in the Create Form mode using the incremental alphanumeric or bar code commands The incremental dynamic data itself is supplied during the Execute Form mode at the top of the form prior to any overlay data The incremental dynamic data either alphanumeric or bar code data can be changed with each new batch of forms Incremental dynamic data fields specified in the Create Form mode will not appear on the form if corresponding incremental dynamic data is not supplied in the Execute Form mode Format For incremental dynamic alphanumeric data cc IAF n idi STEPMASK RPTm RSTn D STARTDATA D For incremental dynamic bar code data cc IBFE idi STEPMASK RPTm RSTn D STARTDATA D cc IAF IBF idir STEPMASK RPTn The Special Function Control Code Identifies the command as an incremental alphanumeric dynamic data enter IAF Identifies the command as an incremental bar code dynamic data enter IBF Identifies the field number of the dynamic data field as entered in the Create Form mode Replace n with the number used to identify the field when it was defined The optional increment direction parameter to specify an increase or decrease of the data Enter a plus sign or leave the field blank to increment the default Enter a minus sign to decrement Defines the increment amount step the number of character positions in the data field and provides a
227. ne Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 EC Defines the ending column of the horizontal line Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 STOP Stop indicates the end of the HORZ command enter STOP If not entered the IGP expects another set of Horizontal Line command parameters Example The following example specifies 2 horizontal lines The first line uses the character row in the R parameter and the second line uses CP DP format To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page HORZ 1 60 15 65 1 60 5 15 65 STOP COLUMN 15 COLUMN 65 ROW 60 ROW 60 5 72 Lines Vertical Lines Vertical Purpose Defines vertical lines Mode CREATE Format VERT LT C SH EH STOP VERT The Vertical Line command enter VERT LT Defines the line thickness measured in 1 60 inch dots Enter a value of 1 or greater Vertical line thickness expands to the right from the starting column C Defines the column where the vertical line begins Enter a value ranging from column 1
228. next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO control code can be changed to any decimal value from 0 through 255 using the printer s front panel See the Configuration Menus chapter in your User s Guide 115 Chapter SC 15 3 Bar Codes Code 128B Example Figure 12 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128B bar code generated by the following program CREATE BARCODE 128B C128B DARK 40 15 SAMP F CODE 128B PDF A STOP BARCODE Enter Create Form mode Bar Code command Dark Code 128B at SR 40 SC 15 Data Field Upper Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command ew Bar Code command C128B VSCAN H12 DARK 31 55 SAMPLE CODE 128B PDF STOP END EXECUTE 128B 1 ood M 116 m SAMPLE CODE 1288 Vert Dark C128B H 1 2 at SR 31 SC 55 Data Field Printable Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminate Create Form mode Execute the form form count of 1 SC 55 SR 31 Figure 12 Sample Code 128 Bar Codes Code 128A 128B and 128C Code 128C Example Figure 13 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128C bar code generated by the following program CREATE 128C Enter Create Form mode BARCODE Bar Code command C128C DARK 35 15 Dark Cod
229. ngated characters Some commands can be used in other modes in addition to the Execute Form mode For example Compressed Print Expanded Print Execute Ignore Select Format and Vertical Line Spacing which are also Normal mode commands can be used in the Execute or Create Form modes The IGP alternate character set can also be used in the Execute Form mode Execute Form General Format Execute Form General Format Purpose Prints forms created in the CREATE mode Mode NORMAL Format cc EXECUTE formname PAGEn FC 1 NT 1 TRST DISK EVFU Data cc AF m D ASCII text D cc BFn D data D cc GF m D logoname D idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTm D STARTDATA D cc IBFE n idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTm D STARTDATA D Overlay Data Form Feed character NORMAL cc The Special Function Control Code EXECUTE The Execute Form command enter EXECUTE formname _ ldentifies a previously defined form by name Enter the form name exactly as used when created PAGEn The optional Pagination command enter PAGE and replace n with the decimal number of the starting page in a sequence of multiple pages The number may be eight digits long and range between 0 and 99999999 The next page after 99999999 is 0 Leave a blank space between the PAGE command and the n value The page number will print on the form in the location defined by the Page Number command in the Create Form mode If th
230. nt with the data Enter the characters for the bar code data A null data field no characters is permitted The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors An even number of characters are required for the interleaving process Consequently if an odd number of characters are entered in the data field a leading zero is added automatically The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively PDF LOC FONT STOP Matrix Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data is not printed This parameter is not allowed if a null data field was specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL con
231. ntal repeat count parameter to specify the number of times a particular field value will repeat before it is incremented A repeated field value is useful when printing multiple rows columns of identical labels before increasing to the next value To use the repeat count parameter enter RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the repeat count The default repeat count parameter is 1 which will increment the field value each time it is printed The optional incremental reset count parameter to specify the number of times an incremented field is printed on one or more forms before it is reset to the starting value A reset count is useful when printing a hierarchy of fields where a low level field generates a sequence of numbers is reset and the next higher field level is incremented such as in a unit box carton application To use the reset count parameter enter RST and replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the reset count The default reset count value is 0 211 Chapter 3 Incremental Bar Code Fields STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters must be less than or equal to the number of characters in the STEPMASK field Characters allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type of bar code refer to the individual bar code descriptions for information on valid type and quantity of data characters
232. nter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 8 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters spec
233. o Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively For UPC E eleven digits are expected Enter the number system character first by entering 0 followed by the five digit manufacturer number ending with the five digit item number The manufacturing number and item number sequences must conform to one of the number pattern sequences shown in Table 18 The IGP will compress the 11 characters of data down to the six encoded UPC E symbol characters Include the 2 or 5 digit add on data at the end of this data field For UPC EO six digits are expected These six digits must be a valid compressed UP
234. o is defined with the same name as a logo already existing in memory the newly defined logo will replace the existing logo Defines the vertical length of the logo grid in dot rows enter a value sufficient for the vertical size of the logo not exceeding 252 The dot rows are vertically spaced 1 72 inch apart Defines the horizontal length of the logo grid in dot columns enter a value sufficient for the horizontal size of the logo not exceeding 240 On each row the dots are horizontally spaced 1 60 inch apart Optional parameter to store the logo on the flash memory Enter DISK Identifies the row number for each row of dots in the logo Enter each row number on a separate command line Rows are numbered sequentially from top to bottom Identifies a single dot position in the row Enter each dot number used Dots are numbered sequentially from left to right Identifies a series of dot positions within the row including dot1 on the left end and dot2 on the right end Enter the series of dot rows Series of dot rows can be combined with single dot positions in the same command line Terminates the Create Logo mode enter END Logo Mode Create Comments The logo is defined by specifying the overall size and the rows of LOGO TAPI 1 12 18 2 10 20 3 9 22 4 8 24 5 7 25 6 6 26 7 5 26 8 4 25 9 4 25 10 3 24 11 3 24 12 2 23 1352 23 data used The actual number of logos you can create and store depends on the
235. ol vertical spacing of the overlay data In place of line feed commands input individually the EVFU can be programmed during the Execute Form mode to slew the overlay data to the predetermined line with a single command 67 Chapter 2 Command Codes Expanded Print Purpose Selects font sizes other than the default font Mode NORMAL EXECUTE Format cc EXPAND VE HE cc The Special Function Control Code EXPAND The Expanded Print command enter EXPAND VE Specifies the vertical expansion factor enter a value ranging from 0 through 113 HE Specifies the horizontal expansion factor enter a value ranging from 0 through 113 Both VE and HE parameters must be zero or non zero If one expansion value is 0 they must both be 0 A VE or HE setting of 1 expands the appropriate plane but produces single size characters A VE and HE setting of 0 produces standard size characters Comments The Expanded Print command uses the 0 10 inch 10 cpi Gothic typeface as the default base value from which alphanumeric characters are expanded The character height can be up to a maximum of 11 3 inches which means if a page is 11 3 inches high you can print a character that fills the entire height of the page After an Expanded Print command is entered all subsequent alphanumerics print at the specified expansion until another Expanded Print command a Normal Mode command or a Reset command is entered An Expanded Print command with VE and
236. olumn of the box Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the last column of the form The ending column must be greater than the starting column Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Stop indicates the end of the Box command enter STOP and the IGP will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP will wait for another set of Box command parameters 43 Chapter 44 2 Command Codes Example The following program and example in Figure 5 defines two boxes To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page Note the position of the ending row and column BOX 3724516751763 One box three dot rows thick 2 44 48 46 58 One box two dot rows thick STOP is ROW 24 48 lt lt ROW 46 COLUMN 58 ROW 51 COLUMN il Figure 5 Box Example Compressed Print Density Compressed Print Density Purpose Mode Format Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch cpi NORMAL EXECUTE cc DENSITY n cc The Special Function Control Code DENSITY The Density command enter DENSITY n Selects the density in cpi OCR A or OCR B enter a value of 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 to specify the density in characters per inch the default is 10 cpi or 10A to select 10 cpi OCR A or 10B to select
237. ommands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP memory delete forms with vertical line elements that are no longer required VERTical line starting row SR gt ending row ER The upper starting row parameter of the vertical line command is greater than or equal to the lower ending row parameter VERTical line thickness LT error The thickness of the vertical line specified by the first parameter in the vertical line command is incorrect This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero Not defined 263 Chapter 6 IGP PGL Emulation Error Codes Box Errors 20 BOX starting column SC out of bounds The left starting column specified by the third parameter in the box command places the box outside the form boundaries 21 BOX starting row SR out of bounds The upper starting row of the box specified by the second parameter in the box command will place the box outside the boundaries of the form 22 BOX ending column EC out of bounds The right ending column specified by the fifth parameter in the box command places the box outside the form boundaries 23 BOX ending row ER out of bounds The lower ending row of the box specified by the fourth parameter in the box command will place the box outside the boundaries of the form 24 BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the
238. on a form Fixed data Overlay data and Dynamic data These methods are described in more detail in Chapter 2 Fixed data prints on each form in the same prepositioned location unless the location changes in the form definition Company name address logo and phone number are typical examples of alphanumeric data that can be fixed onto the form Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data positioned on the page with line feeds and spaces to fit into exact locations For example specific data can be overlayed onto a blank form as if you were typing data into the appropriate blanks on a preprinted form Customer names addresses and order numbers are examples of data overlayed onto a form Dynamic data is variable data entered into specific locations on each form Each time the form prints a command enters new data in those locations Customer names addresses or any type of variable alphanumeric or bar code data can be provided dynamically Incremental Data The incremental data feature allows you to update alphanumeric and bar code data fields in an alphabetical or numeric manner automatically with just one set of data sent from the host computer Alphanumeric and bar code incremental fields can be used with fixed static data input as part of the Create Form Mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form Mode The incremental fields can be increased or decreased repeated at specified intervals before upd
239. onal parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 13 digits plus any add on data 200 DARK SR SC D data field PDF LOC UPCSHIP d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 89 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the
240. orm feeds to correspond to each form printed Customer names addresses and order numbers are examples of variable data that can be overlayed onto the form Dynamic Data Dynamic data is variable data entered by command during the Execute Form mode The dynamic data is entered into a location previously defined in the Create Form mode Any number of locations can be identified during the Create Form mode as part of the form definition A command during the Execute Form mode enters new data in the identified location s each time the form prints Dynamic data is the most efficient method of supplying variable data to the form Again customer names addresses or any type of variable alphanumeric or bar code data can be provided dynamically Incremental Data Fields The incremental data fields feature allows alphanumeric and bar code data fields to automatically update numerically or alphabetically with just one set of data sent from the host computer A maximum of 65 535 forms can print with incremental fields automatically updated Alphanumeric incremental fields can be used with fixed static data input as part of the Create Form mode or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form mode Incremental data fields cannot be used with Overlay data 27 Chapter 28 2 Command Codes Dark Printing A DARK parameter available in the Alpha Reverse and Bar Code commands is a double strike feature which produces bolder darker te
241. ormation C15 55 34 0 0 714 863 1900 STOP END EXECUTE PRACTICE NORMAL Note Remember a blank line must a ways separate the u EXECUTE and NORMAL commands Notice that the END EXECUTE PRACTICE and NORMAL statements are still in the file These are always necessary to end the storage of the form in the IGP and cause it to print Print the file PRACTC FRM The PRACTICE form should look like Figure 52 except for any alphanumeric data substitutions you made Again if error messages occur refer to Solving Program Errors on page 248 Adding a Bar Code COLUMN 16 COLUMN 22 ROW 31 MOTOR INC ROW 32 17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD ROW 33 IRVINE CA 92714 ROW 35 9 sep IAL NUMBER COLUMN 50 tootumn 17 ROW 40 3 PART NUMBER MFG DATE ROW 45 3 gt DESCRIPTION ROW 49 3 INTERFACE VERSION ROW 54 Call Acne MOTOR for more information 714 863 1900 4 t ROW 55 COLUMN 26 COLUMN 34 Figure 52 Practice Form Example Adding a Bar Code 11 Change the form definition by adding bar code type Code 39 C3 9 one of the codes available on the IGP First reopen the file Bar codes are defined in the Create Form mode therefore the Bar Code command must be entered before the End command line In the Bar Code command specify type C3 9 and 0 8 inch height Hn Use a dynamic bar code data field BF identified by the number n 1 with
242. otation marks are required 75 Not defined 76 EXECUTE page number error An error was made while specifying the page number used with the form being executed This error can be generated because of incorrect format or a page number that is too large The specified page number can range from 0 through 99 999 999 Since the page number is part of the Execute command the IGP will revert to the Normal mode 77 EXECUTE format or delimiter error A format or delimiter error was detected in the Execute command the IGP will revert to the Normal mode This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a A missing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters e Page command misspelled when specifying the page number 78 Insufficient memory to EXECUTE the form Insufficient memory was available to recall and execute a form The IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode 79 Not defined Miscellaneous Errors 80 Special function must be called from the NORMAL mode This special function must be called from the Normal mode and not the Create Form or Execute Form mode This error is generally due to a missing End command in the Create Form mode For example an attempt to enter the Create Form mode while executing a form will cause the IGP automatically to revert to the Normal mode 81 No such
243. ough 15 or 1 through 16 lines on the form depending on how the Slew Range configuration option is configured Refer to Table 24 which illustrates how lines are skipped for each value Note that the state of data bit 5 is the difference between line slewing and using the interface lines as EVFU channel codes This type of vertical paper motion occurs whenever the line slewing command is used regardless of whether the EVFU memory is loaded or not Table 24 Line Space Slewing Slew Range Data Bits Configuration Value 5 4 0 ese O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O N O OQ O O OQ Q N O OI 7 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X x X x x x KIO X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High Note The ASCII values in Table 24 assume that all undefined bits I are set to 0 When the PI line is enabled data bit 8 is the PI line a serial interface and data bit 8 is undefined on a parallel interface 284 General EVFU Programming Paper Motion Using the EVFU The Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU is an efficient method of skipping to a specified print position during repetitive printing tasks The EVFU affects the vertical placement of overlay data produced in the Execute Form mode General EVFU Programming The general EVFU programming proc
244. parameters of the box command This error is usually caused by one or more of the following a A missing semicolon b A colon in place of a semicolon Too many or too few parameters in the command string d Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the parameters 25 Insufficient memory to store the BOX No more room in the IGP memory exists for another box The rest of the box commands are flushed until the Stop command is found Processing will then continue normally To create space in the IGP memory delete forms with box elements that are no longer required 26 BOX starting column SC gt ending column EC The left starting column parameter of the box command is greater than or equal to the right ending column parameter 27 BOX starting row SR ending row ER The upper starting row parameter of the box command is greater than or equal to the lower ending row parameter 28 BOX line thickness LT error The thickness of the box specified by the first parameter in the box command is incorrect This error is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero 29 Not defined 264 Corner Errors Corner Errors 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 CORNER starting column SC out of bounds The left starting column specified by the third parameter in the corner command places the corner outside the form boundaries CORNER starting row SR out of bounds The upper starting row of the
245. phanumeric command but it does not replace the standard alphanumeric command CREATE TE VDUP 3 6 ALPHA EST 288 1 6 5 4 4 00001 12345 STOP VDUP OFF EXECUTE EST NORMAL 12345 12344 12343 39 Chapter 2 Command Codes Alphanumerics Incremental Dynamic Data Fields Purpose Automatically increments decrements dynamic alphanumeric data fields Specifies the location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during the Create Form mode STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the Execute command during the Execute Form mode Mode CREATE Note In the command format below incremental alphanumeric command parameters shown boldface type standard alphanumeric command parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are shown in italics Format ALPHA Cn AF m L DIR UC DARK POINT HSn or HSDn SR SC VE HE STOP IAFn L Identifies this alphanumeric command as an Incremental Alphanumeric Dynamic Data Field command The command parameter string identifies the incremental dynamic data field location on the form and defines the length of the alphanumeric data If these parameters are used the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters can not be entered in the Create Form mode they are entered dynamically during the Execute Forms mode To use the incremental dynamic data field perform the follo
246. pressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm UPC E and UPC EO UPC E Command Format BARCODE type n DIR MAG BF DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE type Designates bar code type UPC E or UPC E0 enter UPC E or UPC EO Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code Enter plus 4 and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard pattern DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for for variable ratio Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height
247. print overlay data at specific positions on the form The two AF lines also shown in italics represent the dynamic data While the EVFU does not affect dynamic data positioning data placement is defined by the ALPHA statement when the form was created the commands are shown to specify where they would occur in relation to the EXECUTE command the EVFU load sequence and the overlay data 289 Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU The four lines of EVFU overlay data shown in boldface type follow the two lines of dynamic data This overlay data is positioned on the form according to the specified channel codes called The superscript hexadecimal numbers enclosed in symbols represent calls to the four unique EVFU channel codes cc EXECUTE formname PAGE nj FC ICNTn RST n 1E 10 11 11 11 1B 13 11 11 12 11 15 11 1F AF1 DYNAMIC DATA 1 AF2 DYNAMIC DATA 2 lt 13 gt D ATA FOR LINE 6 lt gt lt 10 gt lt 12 gt DATA FOR LINE 9 lt 1 gt FOR VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL 15 DATA FOR LINE 11 Form Feed character cc NORMAL When the IGP receives a channel call it searches for that channel from the current print position in the EVFU load sequence to the end of the EVFU load sequence If that channel is found the current print position moves to that position on the page If the channel is not found the search continues from the beginning of the EVFU load sequence to the current print position If thi
248. processed when VGL is included in the software package If not this command is simply ignored The switching of emulations causes PGL to perform a soft reset Therefore front panel selections return to their saved state and all forms and logos resident in RAM memory are deleted End Purpose Terminates the current mode of operation and must be used before entering a new mode command EXECUTE LOGO NORMAL or even CREATE Mode CREATE Format END Comments After the End command is received the IGP flushes program errors stores the error free portions of the form program just completed and then returns to the Normal mode If the debug slash is included in the Create command the program prints with any corresponding error messages 57 Chapter 58 2 Command Codes Execute Form Mode How to Use the Execute Command Forms are printed in the Execute Form mode In addition to printing the form in the Execute Form mode variable data can also be entered onto the form dynamically during the Execute Form mode This dynamic data input during the Execute Form mode includes page numbers alphanumeric data fields and bar code data fields Pagination described on page 78 is performed in the Execute Form mode Dynamic alphanumeric and bar code data require additional commands within the Execute Form mode The fastest method for repeated forms printing is to use the form feed character Rather than sending a series of
249. pter 3 Bar Codes BFn L DARK SR SC D 138 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BF n L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the startin
250. r END Note 1 All CONFIG parameters except RESET must be followed by a semicolon Any CONFIG parameters not entered in UPPERCASE and exactly as listed in Table 6 will result in an Error 156 Refer to the Error Codes chapter Configuration Table 6 Configuration Parameters Configuration Parameter Value Al 00 SPACES 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled AUTO WRAP 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled CARRIAGE RETURN DEF 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled CR EDIT 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled ERROR REPORT 0 Off 1 On 2 Debug EXT EXECUTE COPY 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled HOST FORM LENGTH 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled IGNORE CHAR 0 255 the selected ignore char any other value ignore mode off IGP100 COMPATBL 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled 2 5 SELECTION 1 Trailing Spaces 2 X2DPD 3 Modulo 7 CD any other value Leading Zero LINE FEED DEF 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled LPI 6 8 9 or 10 OPTIMIZED RATIO 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled PRINTER PI LINE 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled SFCC 1 255 SKIP PREFIX 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled SLASH ZERO 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled SLEW RANGE 0 15 Non Zero 16 SO CHAR 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled TRUE FORM SLEW 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled UPPERCASE 0 Disabled Non Zero Enabled POWER ON IGP PGL 0
251. r duplication Duplication Horizontal Example The following example is a horizontal duplication of a series of vertical lines To illustrate positioning starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page HDUP 14 4 14 dupes with 4 character column spacing VERT Command to be duplicated horizontally 1210759 5926 Note CP DP format 59 6 2210 3558 02 59 9 1 11 58 6 60 1343435 58 372603 1 12 58 60 6 1712 3 58 3 00 3 1 13 58 6 60 113 358 9259 9 STOP Terminates the duplicated element command HDUP OFF Terminates the horizontal duplication COLUMN 10 COLUMN 11 COLUMN 12 COLUMN 13 ROW 58 elh DUPLICATING THE SET HORIZONTALLY 14 TIMES ROW 60 6 COLUMN 13 3 COLUMN 12 3 COLUMN 11 3 COLUMN 10 3 55 56 Chapter 2 Command Codes Duplication Vertical Purpose Defines both the number of times elements are duplicated vertically and the spacing between each duplication Mode CREATE Format VDUP dup offset elements to be duplicated VDUP OFF VDUP The Vertical Duplication command enter VDUP dup Specifies number of times the entered form element s will repeat vertically Enter a value ranging from 1 through 512 offset Specifies the vertical offset to establish the vertical spacing between each duplication of the form element s specified in the body of the command Enter a value in t
252. r use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not print with the data The bar code data For PostBar enter values 0 through 3 to represent the four different types of bars For Royal Mail enter alphanumeric data through Z and 0 through 9 If using the KIX format for Royal Mail lowercase characters a through z are also valid Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message will result 165 Chapter 166 3 Bar Codes PostBar and Royal Mail Examples Figure 33 illustrates a horizontal Royal Mail bar code generated by the following program CREATE ROYALBAR BARCODE ROYALBAR X1A 10 40 SN34RD STOP END 1 EXECUT E ROYALBAR 1 O Enter Create Form Mode Bar Code command Royal Mail bar code at SR 10 C 40 with Mag 1A Data Field Ends Bar Code command Terminates Create Form Mode Execute the form with a form count of 1 SC 40 SR 10 Figure 33 Sample Royal Mail bar code X1A Magnification Figure 34 illustrates a horizontal PostBar bar code generated by the following program
253. r width is 031 inch 008 inch Spacing pitch between each bar no bar must be 1 16 inch Bar tilt slant can vary 5 degrees relative to a line perpendicular to the top edge of the envelope FIM Command Format BARCODE FIM DIR Hn m BFn DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE FIM Designates bar code type FIM enter FIM DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented Hn m Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 6 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 6 to 9 9 inches The default value is 0 6 inches m is an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale BFn Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps 131 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Enter BF Replace n with a number
254. racter set is selected calling character address cell 5B E substitutes the Danish character residing at C6 from the Multinational Character Set When the Spanish character set is selected calling character address cell 7C f substitutes the Spanish character residing at F1 from the Multinational Character Set These substitutions are automatically performed when a particular Multinational Character Set is selected Table 22 Substitution Set Hex Values Character Set Substitution Hex Value U S ASCII 21 22 23 24 25 26 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E Danish C6 D8 C5 BO E6 F8 E5 Dutch A3 80 81 English Finnish 4 C4 D6 C5 E4 F6 E5 FC French EO FB E7 A7 FA EA E9 E8 EE German A7 C4 D6 DC E4 F6 FC DF Italian A7 BO E9 83 F9 EO F2 E8 EC Norwegian A4 C9 C6 D8 C5 DC E9 E6 F8 E5 FC Spanish 82 C3 D1 D5 A1 E3 F1 F5 BF Swedish A4 C9 C4 D6 C5 DC E9 E4 F6 E5 FC Turkish 84 C7 E7 85 86 D6 DC 87 88 89 F6 FC 8A 252 OCR Character Sets Accessing Characters and Character Sets OCR Character Sets Purpose Accesses OCR A and OCR B character sets Mode CREATE NORMAL and EXECUTE Format See Comments Comments In the Create mode you can access OCR fonts using the alphanumeric command Use the Cn parameter in the
255. re 55 on page 241 Use the Special Function Control Character and Create command to define a form named HCBOATS Use the Box command to define the outer border with a line thickness LT 3 top left corner at row SH 11 column SC 10 and bottom right corner at row ER 55 column EC 70 In the same Box command sequence define another box with a line thickness of 2 top left corner at row 28 column 14 and bottom right corner at row 44 9 column 66 After defining the boxes stop the Box command Enter Format CREATE HCBOATS CREATE formname FL BOX BOX 3 11 10 55 70 LT SR SC ER EC 2 28 14 44 9 66 STOP STOP 5 Mr Handcraft would like corners around the slogan Use the Corner command to define a line thickness LT of 2 top left corner at row SR 48 column SC 24 and bottom right corner at row ER 52 column EC 56 Make the vertical VL corner piece 4 spaces long and the horizontal HL corner piece 5 spaces long Then stop the Corner command Enter Format CORNER CORNER 2 48 24 52 56 4 5 LT SR SC ER EC VL HL STOP STOP 6 To make the columns for the special order items add two vertical lines each with a line thickness LT of 1 one line in column C 22 and the other line in column 58 Each line will start at row SH 28 and end at row ER 44 9 Enter Format VERT VERT 1 22 28 44 9 LT C SR ER 1 58 28 44 9 STOP STOP 7 To add the horizontal lines define one line and then duplicate that line using the Ver
256. ree ways a Enter 0 to define a form of unspecified length The form will end after the longest element that is the form length is automatically controlled to contain all elements without extra length beyond the longest element This can be used to eliminate wasted paper after producing short forms b Enter a value for the form length ranging from 1 through 65 535 to specify the forms length in dot rows 12 dot rows per line 6 Ipi spacing 9 dot rows per line 8 spacing 51 Chapter 52 2 Command Codes specify the default forms length of 792 dot rows 11 inches at do not enter a value in the form length parameter DISK Optional parameter to store the form on the printer s flash memory Enter DISK Example following command creates a form named ORDER with the default forms length CREATE ORDER Delete Form Purpose Mode Format Deletes the form identified by the form name from the directory and the IGP memory NORMAL cc DELETE FORM formname DISK cc The Special Function Control Code DELETE FORM The Delete Form command enter DELETE FORM formname _ ldentifies the form to be deleted Enter the name of the form exactly as it was created You can delete an entire form directory by inputting ALL as the form name DISK Optional parameter to delete the form from the flash memory where it was originally stored Enter DISK Commen
257. refully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to readable bar codes Variable Ratio Sample CREATE TEST SCALE CHAR ALPHA 255 1 1 Std Ratio STOP BARCODE C3 9 X1 H7 D 35 5 ACODE39A PDF B STOP ALPHA 2 30 1 1 VAR Ratio STOP BARCODE C3 9 XR2 2 5 5 H7 D 3 30 ACODE39A PDF B STOP END EXECUTE TEST 1 NORMAL Std Ratio VAR Ratio MAOA CODE3S 9 89 Chapter 3 Overview PDF Character Sizes PDF LOC FONT UPC and EAN For UPC and EAN bar codes a smaller Letter Gothic font will be substituted for OCR A or OCR B when the bar code symbol is not large enough to accommodate a 10 CPI font Other Bar Codes For all other bar codes OCR A and OCR B will print at 10 CPI If necessary when using the Normal font the PDF will be automatically sized to fit the length of the bar code symbol Table 8 IGP PGL Bar Code Specification Summary T Average Narrow Magnification Character Description Element Width l Ratio Parameter Density cpi mils Codabar X1 16 7 5 4 4 3 2 1 Code 39 16 7 3 75 31 Telepen X1A 16 7 4 6 2 1 X1B 16 7 4 2 2 51 X2 37 5 1 9 2 34 X3 54 2 1 3 2 51 X4 70 8 1 1 2 41 Code 128A X1 16 7 5 4 4 3 2 1 128 1 5 25 0 4 1 4 3 2 1 Code 93 2 33 0 2 7 4 3 2 1 UPS
258. rements Horizontal pitch is automatically adjusted based on the point size selected The point parameter cannot be used when in CREATE mode Use the point parameter of the ALPHA command SPACE Selects a spacing alignment scheme where applicable Enter SPACE a space followed by a value 0 through 3 Comments Font parameters in Normal and Execute modes do not affect the fonts that have already been established and saved on a form Font commands issued in the Create mode affect only the current form being created and not any of the fonts on other forms or for Execute or Normal mode text 69 Chapter 70 2 Command Codes Example You can use any or all Font parameters listed in any order in a single Font command Do not list font parameters on separate lines Parameters and symbol sets not specified retain the previously selected value Parameters incorrectly specified retain the previously selected value All Font command parameters are reset to default values upon receiving a NORMAL RESET CONFIG RESET or new CREATE command Multiple font commands within a single form will save the last font command parameters specified Symbol sets can also be selected using the ISET or USET commands Refer to Chapter 5 To change font width and height use the Compressed Print Density or Expanded Print commands described on pages 47 and 72 respectively The following command prints the current font bolded with a right
259. reverse print with all form elements alpha lines Scale boxes etc The IGP can also reverse print bar codes but reverse printed bar codes are unreadable by scanning devices Purpose Mode Format Defines the vertical line spacing and the horizontal pitch of the form for data positioning specified by character row and column or dot row and column CREATE SCALE DOT horz vert or SCALE CHAR 0 cpi SCALE The Scale command enter SCALE DOT Specifies the dot scale Enter DOT horz vert Gives resolution for the dot parameter Default is 60 dpi horizontal by 72 dpi vertical CHAR Specifies the character scale Enter CHAR The optional vertical line spacing parameter in lines per inch for character scaling Enter 6 8 9 or 10 The default is 6 cpi The optional horizontal pitch parameter in characters per inch for character scaling Enter 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 The default is 10 cpi Comments If the character scale is selected starting row column or ending row column parameters are specified by character row and column The lines per inch value for a character scale form can be 6 8 9 or 10 Characters per inch cpi can be either 10 12 13 15 17 or 20 For example on a printer with a maximum print width of 80 columns an 8 1 2 x 11 inch form at the 10 cpi default has 66 rows and 80 columns in the character scale Refer to your printer User s Guide to det
260. rial interface Print File PRINT Prints a file from the flash memory 80 Quiet QUIET IGP operation is disabled until a Listen command is received 81 Any data sent to the line matrix printer emulation is unaffected by IGP commands Recall RECALL Recalls forms or logos from memory stored in setup ptx 81 Reset RESET Deletes all forms and logos from the IGP memory 82 17 Chapter 1 ThelGP PGL Emulation Table 1 Normal Mode Commands continued Command Mnemonic Description Page Special Function SFCC Changes the current Special Function Control Code SFCC 86 Control Code Select Format SFON Ignores all host generated paper movement commands See 84 On Off SFOFF note on page 20 Set Up SETUP Automatically executes and loads the IGP PGL commands into 85 the printer at power up or after a RESET command is sent Create Form Mode Create Form Mode commands design forms all form components and bar codes The forms are not printed in the Create Form Mode forms are printed in the Execute Form Mode after all form design is completed To begin form design access the Create Form Mode using the Create command The Create command is always used to enter the Create Form Mode to begin form design Note The CREATE command must be entered in UPPERCASE I Each element has its own specific set of commands and parameters that determine size location and content Listed in alphabetical order Create
261. rm Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 89 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data Contains the bar code characters A null data field no characters is permitted The data field can contain any of the characters listed in Table 10 except the SFCC The length of the data field is variable however the maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters to minimize potential reading errors Optional parameter to enable printing of the human readable data field Enter PDF to print the data field If the parameter is not used the human readable data will not print This parameter is not allowed if a null data field is specified Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch FONT STOP Telepen Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter
262. rm Mode the user sends text images and bar code data to the IGP All of this data is stored in memory An End statement terminates the IGP data string The printer returns to Normal Mode You can create as many forms as you wish and store them on your host These forms can then be downloaded from your host to the printer When you execute a form you can print it as many times as you wish This saves you time downloading the form each time you want to print it Printer Operating Mode What It Means Normal Mode Printer receives data and prints text graphics Create Form Mode You send IGP commands to the printer Execute Form Mode Printer prints the form designed in Create Form Mode Normal Mode Printer returns to Normal Mode Figure 1 IGP Modes Modes of Operation The IGP has five modes of operation that use specific command sequences to control the IGP Inthe Normal Mode the printer waits for an SFCC in order to perform IGP functions Quiet Mode all IGP commands are ignored except the LISTEN command n the Create Logo Mode the printer produces graphics such as forms logos bar codes and alphanumeric data The Execute Mode is the IGP printing mode which controls when the actual printing of the bar codes and graphics will occur n Create Form Mode the printer produces graphics such as forms logos bar codes and alphanumeric data Chapter 16 1 The IGP PGL Emulation Normal
263. s search is successful the current form is printed the next form is called and the current print position moves to that position on the next page If the channel called is not found in either search the channel call is treated as if it were a line feed 290 EVFU Example EVFU Channel Code Sent Line No Form Output top of form Form 1 DATA FOR LINE 6 undefined hex 17 causes single line feed top of form Form 2 top of form Form 3 DATA FOR VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL DATA FOR LINE 11 End Load Figure 58 Sample EVFU Form 291 Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU 292 Alphanumeric command 29 data 27 duplicating incremental fields 41 dynamic data 234 errors 266 execute dynamic data 62 execute overlay data 67 increment fixed data 38 incremental commands 34 incremental dynamic data 40 66 Alphanumeric Data 27 dynamic data 27 fixed data 27 incremental data 27 overlay data 27 Application identifiers UCC EAN 128 174 ASCII Character Set 277 Auto Increment Example 225 B Bar Code duplicating incremental fields 214 errors 271 execute dynamic data 63 features 14 incremental dynamic data 66 212 incremental fields 208 overview 87 user defined 89 Bar Code Command 233 Bar Codes Index Codabar 91 Code 128A 108 Code 128B 108 Code 128C 108 Code 39 96 Code 93 102 EAN 13 123 EAN 8 118 FIM 129 German I 2 5 135 2 5 135 Interleaved 2 5 135 ITF 14 135 M
264. s accurate scanning 119 Chapter 3 Bar Codes EAN 8 Command Format BARCODE EAN8 n D R SCB MAG Hn m BF n DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE EAN8 N DIR SCB MAG Hn m BFn 120 The Bar Code command enter BARCODE Designates bar code type EAN 8 enter 8 Optional parameter to provide a 2 or 5 digit add on code at the end of the bar code data field Enter a plus sign and a value of 2 or 5 The first bar of the add on code is separated by nine modules from the last bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard pattern No center or right guard pattern exists Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented This option shortens the length of the center guard bars which are normally full length Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table 8 You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page 89 You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable ratio Optional parameter to adjust the overall height vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height
265. s from 0 4 through 9 9 inches The default value is 1 3 inches The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale BFn Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF 125 Chapter 126 3 Bar Codes DARK SR SC D data field b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 12 digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified bas
266. s with user selectable thickness logos and special alphanumeric print features Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned fixed information entered when the form is created can be overlayed onto the form positioned in a specific location after the form is created or may be dynamically merged with the form Selectable Bar Codes provide appropriate bar codes for your application using standard wide to narrow ratios A wide selection of bar codes are available Codabar Code 39 Code 93 Interleaved 2 of 5 German 1 2 5 ITF 14 FIM Matrix MSI A through D Code 128 Subset A B and C UCC EAN 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 PDF417 POSTNET PostBar Royal Mail Telepen UPC A UPC E and UPC E0 UPCSHIP and UPS 11 UPC and EAN bar codes can also specify add on data Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size up to 11 3 inches wide and tall Compressed print sizes of 12 13 15 and 17 characters per inch cpi are available Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise or they can be printed upside down Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and add a variety of print
267. sed the human readable data will not print Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 151 Chapter 3 Bar Codes MSI Example Figure 27 illustrates a horizontal and vertical MSI bar code generated by the following program CREATE MSI Enter Create Form mode 1 BARCODE Bar Code command MSIA DARK 32 27 Dark Bar Code MSIA at SR 32 SC 27 24688642 Data Field PDF X Printable Data Field OCR B STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command MSIB VSCAN X2 H12 DARK 32 54 Vert Dark MSIB Mag 2 H 1 2 at SR3 2 SC 54 24688642 Data Field PDF A Upper Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form mode EXECUTE MSI 1 Execute the form form count of 1 SC 27 SC 54
268. sed to define and store the logo Optional parameter to retrieve logo from the flash memory Enter DISK Stop indicates the end of the LOGO command enter STOP and the IGP will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP expects another set of Logo Call command parameters The following sample program specifies three logo calls placing the same logo at three different locations The logo was previously defined and stored The starting row and column specify the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was defined To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page SC 50 SC 65 Note When the logo to be executed is not found in memory the LOGO NOT FOUND error is printed 75 Chapter 2 Command Codes Logo Mode Create Purpose Places the IGP in the Create Logo mode where logos can be defined using the appropriate dot placements Mode NORMAL Format logoname VL HL DISK row dot dot1 dot2 dot END cc LOGO logoname VL HL DISK row dot dot1 dot2 END 76 The Special Function Control Code The Logo command enter LOGO Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the logo Refer to page 24 for a list of allowable Logo Name characters All future references to this logo Delete Logo or Logo Call commands must use this name If a log
269. slant This font will continue to print until another Font command a Normal mode command or a Reset command is entered FONT BOLD ON SLANT RIGHT Form Length Purpose Sets the length of the form to a specific number of lines at 6 or 8 Mode CREATE Format LFORM6 n or LFORM8 n LFORM6 The Form Length command for 6 Ipi forms enter LFORM6 LFORM8 The Form Length command for 8 Ipi forms enter LFORMS8 n Specifies the form length in total number of lines allowed per form The range depends on the paper size used An error message will result if the maximum line values are exceeded Note This command affects only printed text inside of IGP forms not the printer Ipi The LFORM8 command considers a line as 9 dot rows the LFORM6 command considers a line as 12 dot rows The 9 and 12 dot rows per line matches the dot rows of the printer in the DP mode if set to 8 or respectively Example LFORM6 48 The following example establishes a form length of 8 inches 48 lines at 6 Ipi Ignore Sequence Ignore Sequence Purpose Enables the IGP to ignore all characters after the Ignore Sequence On IGON command is entered All characters are ignored until the Ignore Sequence Off IGOFF command is entered Mode NORMAL CREATE or EXECUTE Format cc IGON or cc GOFF Note A line terminator is not required in the Ignore Sequence cc The Special Function Control Code IGON Ignore Sequence O
270. sociations according to specific applications 1 Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode EXC Comprised of four sub modes this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters This is the default mode the PGL uses shift or latch characters to enable other modes 2 Binary ASCII Plus mode This offers encodation for all ASCII characters printable or not and binary values 3 Numeric Compaction mode This offers encodation for numeric values to a density of almost 3 digits per code word 4 The PGL will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest encodation for the data Security Level PDF417 can detect and correct errors Each label has 2 code words of error detection You can select the error correction capacity based on application needs Specify a security level in the range of 0 8 at the time of printing PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode one to detect the error and one to correct for it a given security level can support half the number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words PDF Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be encoded PDF417 PDF417 Command Format BARCODE PDF417 DIR X D n Y D n Hn Wn ASPECTA w Rm Cn Sn BEn L DARK SH SC D data fiela D STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE PDF417 DIR
271. ss of a box etc simply open the file and change the appropriate command lines Otherwise his salespeople have a new form for notes on custom orders 245 Chapter 4 _ Form Design HandCraft Boats CUSTOMER PHONE HULL NO RIGGING COLOR DELIVERY DATE SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS DESCRIPTION HandCraft Boats 123 Boat Way Boat Town CA 333444 714 555 0011 Quality Boats Crafted By Hand wc Figure 57 Completed Sample Form 246 Example Directory Command The Directory command lists the contents of the IGP directory in IGP memory The directory command provides the following information All form names and logo names currently defined e The association of logos to forms The amount of memory used for form storage The amount of dynamic storage space used and available Example A form will not execute unless enough room exists in the memory as indicated in the work space bytes free portion of the directory listing To print the directory open a file input the directory command exit the file and print For example Enter Format DIRECT FOM System Format DIRECTORY cc DIRECTORY PRINT DIRECT FOM System Format The Directory command can only be used when the IGP is in the Normal mode Upon completion of the directory listing the IGP returns to the Normal mode If the IGP is not in the Normal mode input the Normal mode command before the Directory command Form Directory Form Na
272. stBar POSTBAR Variable Numeric 163 POSTNET POSTNET 5 9 or 11 Numeric 158 digits Royal Mail ROYALBAR Variable Alphanumeric 163 Telepen TELEPEN Variable Alphanumeric 167 UCC EAN 128 UCC 128 Variable Alphanumeric 173 UPC A UPC A 11 Numeric 185 UPC E and UPC E 11 0r 6 Numeric 191 UPC EO UPCSHIP UPCSHIP 13 digits Numeric 198 UPS11 UPS11 10 digits Alphanumeric 203 User Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios User Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios The user defined variable ratio for bar codes is an optional parameter The default ratios shown in Table 8 are overridden by the variable ratio feature Four and eight digit ratios can be used depending upon the bar code selected Ratio data must be decimal values greater than 0 Enter R followed by the actual bar code ratio A colon must separate each element of the ratio Like standard bar code ratios user defined ratios are also interpreted from left to right measuring the size of each bar or space in dot width in the following pattern narrow bar narrow space wide bar wide space Enter either four or eight values depending upon the bar code type See Table 8 for the number of values needed If the D parameter is specified the ratios are represented in printer dots instead of IGP dots 60 x 72 dpi Note The IGP does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable wide narrow element relationships for bar code readability When designing unique ratio data ca
273. stal Service s Publication 25 A Guide to Business Mail Preparation POSTNET Postage Area LI 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHECK DIGIT 5 SR SC I ftt POSITION lt i 2 1 1 Li c l ul I I o 1 1 I amp 5 I m I N 1 7p I I tt 1 8 1 1 lt i I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I QUIET l 1 ZONE L 1 g o lt o o lt c E gt 2 tc NOTE Illustration is not to scale Figure 31 POSTNET Structure VSCAN or CCW 159 Chapter 160 3 Bar Codes Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends 4 75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece In addition a minimum quiet zone of 0 040 inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start and stop codes are referred to as framing bars in POSTNET The start and stop codes are each one tall bar one identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bar code scanning in a left to right direction only Data Field The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5 digit data field 50 bars for a 9 digit data field or 60 bars for an 11 digit data field The bars are grouped in sets of f
274. t page 26 Defines the length of the vertical arm including the line thickness of each corner in the set Enter a value of 1 or greater specified in character or dot rows based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the length of the horizontal arm including the line thickness of each corner in the set Enter a value of 1 or greater specified in character or dot columns based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 49 Chapter 2 Command Codes STOP Stop indicates the end of the CORNER command enter STOP and the IGP will wait for a new command If not entered the IGP will wait for another set of Corner command parameters Example The following program specifies a corner set as shown in Figure 6 To illustrate positioning the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the page Note the position of the ending row and ending column they do not include the line thickness CORNER 5273277423557476 Each corner in the set is 5 STOP dot rows thick 4 character rows high 6 character columns wide COLUMN 27 HORIZONTAL LENGTH 6 COLUMNS www ROW 27 VERTICAL LENGTH 4 ROWS lt ROW 42 COLUMN 55 Figure 6 Corner Example 50 Create Create Purpose Mode Format Places the IGP in the Create Form mode where forms and form elements can be defined using the appropriate comman
275. t top to bottom order The following examples illustrate the results of duplicated incremental fields Description STARTDATA aude numeric field 01 1 STEPMASK RST 0 HDUP 3 Printed Results VDUP 2 1 2 Field Unlinked subfields alpha A STARTDATA A01 D OR STEPMASK X01 STARTDATA Unlinked subfields alpha B 4 numeric 01 STEPMASK BPT 1 5 0 Printed Results No HDUP or VDUP Page 1 A01 B01 A02 A03 A01 Example The following program will produce the Incremental Alphanumeric data example shown above The program elements are also defined Refer to the command format on page 38 41 Chapter 42 2 Command Codes CREATE TEST HDUP 3 6 VDUP 3 1 ALPHA I 1 1 0 0 001 RPT3 RST9 01 STOP VDUP OFF HDUP OFF ALPHA I 1 18 0 0 001 RPT1 BO1 STOP END EXECUTE TEST 2 NORMAL where 1 1 1 0 0 001 RPT3 RST9 A01 Incremental alphanumeric command SR of 1 SC of 1 VE and HE are 0 001 stepmask increments by 1 RPT3 repeats each field value 3 times RST9 prints and increments each field 9 times before resetting A01 is the starting value 1 1 18 0 0 001 RPT1 BO1 Incremental alphanumeric command SR of 1 SC of 18 VE and HE are 0 001 stepmask increments by 1 RPT1 repeats each field value once RSTO is not used default value is 0 prints and increments continuously without resettin
276. t Format you may enter the following IGP paper movement commands All the commands must be entered in UPPERCASE These commands can only be used with the Select Format command If used at any other time an error condition may result Command Paper Movement Function cc CR Sends a carriage return hex OD cc LF Sends a line feed hex 0A cc FF Sends a form feed hex OC Although the Select Format command enables the IGP to ignore all host generated paper movement commands you can input IGP paper movement commands with Select Format on SFON SFOFF cannot be used during Ignore Sequence page 71 Setup Setup Purpose Mode Format Automatically executes and loads IGP PGL commands such as forms logos customized print environments etc from flash memory to the printer whenever printer power is applied or when the RESET command page 82 is sent NORMAL cc SETUP HOST DATA cc SETUPEND cc The Special Function Control Code SETUP The Setup command enter SETUP HOST DATA Any IGP PGL commands form definitions text etc to be stored and executed at power up SETUPEND Finishes storing host data and returns the printer to the NORMAL mode Enter SETUPEND Comments Because the RESET command causes the setup routine to be executed the RESET command can not be in the SETUP information or else an infinite loop will occur If IGP PGL commands have not been added between the SETUP and SETUPEND commands th
277. t dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be included BFn L DARK SR Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form Mode the data is not specified during the Create Form Mode To use this field perform the following steps a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the qata field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale
278. t provides a mask to link or unlink subfields of data for individual incremental activity The data provided in the STEPMASK field combined with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of these functions 208 Incrementing Bar Code Data Table 20 Incremental Bar Code Data STEPMASK STARTDATA Character Type and Function 0 9 A Z Alpha characters are incremented by amount in STEPMASK field 0 9 0 9 Numeric characters are incremented by amount in STEPMASK field 0 9 Space Same character type as character in the next right adjacent linked increment position Character type is numeric if in the least significant position 0 9 Not A Z or Error 0 9 Not 0 9 or L Any Non incrementing alphanumeric character L Any Linked non incrementing alphanumeric character The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK data For example a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA by 1 a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2 The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA is defined by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field and depends on the specific type of bar code the STARTDATA field cannot contain more characters than used in the STEPMASK field and can only contain the number and type of characters allowed by the bar code Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is defined by using the L value in the STE
279. t zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements In the bar code each character encoded is separated by a narrow space Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Matrix Matrix Command Format BARCODE MATRIX CD D R MAG Hn m BF n L DARK SR SC D data field D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE MATRIX CD Designates bar code type Matrix enter MATRIX DIR MAG Hn m To calculate and plot the optional modulo 10 check digit with the bar code symbol automatically enter CD Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV
280. ta 1 and 2 is nonincrementing Printed Results 123 BPT 1 ABD124 m RPT 0 ABI129 ABJ120 36 Alphanumerics Incremental Fields Value Description STARTDATA 1 Single numeric field with leading STEPMASK 0001 spaces RPT 1 Printed Results __1 RPT 0 _ 2 2710 Value Description STARTDATA A98 Two separate but linked numeric STEPMASK 01101 subfields AA and 98 with leading space J fixed data AA is Printed Results A298 nonincrementing 1 i i RST 0 1AA00 Value Description STARTDATA _42AR Two separate but linked alpha STEPMASK 01101 subfields A and R with leading space J fixed data 42 is Printed Results nonincrementing FA RPT 1 RST 0 _ 42272 A42AA Value Description STARTDATA 9AA02 Single numeric field decremented by STEPMASK XXX01 1 while fixed data 9 and AA are nonincrementing Printed Results 9AA02 9AA01 9AA00 9AA99 9AA03 37 Chapter 2 Command Codes Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields Purpose To automatically increment decrement fixed alphanumeric data fields Mode CREATE Note In the command format below incremental alphanumeric command parameters shown in boldface type Standard alphanumeric command parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are shown in italics and are described in the Alphanumerics section starting on page 29 Due to space constraints
281. th of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it is not printed with the data The characters of the bar code data are restricted to exactly seven digits If the 2 or 5 digit add on data option is used include this data at the end of the data field The characters available for the data field are 0 through 9 30 through 39 hex respectively Optional parameter to print the human readable data field The data field prints automatically unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter The human readable data field can be printed above or below the bar code symbol If no PDF command is entered the data field will print automatically in the default OCR B font 121 Chapter 3 Bar Codes LOC Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates t
282. the left side data field format based on the number System character Optional parameter which affects printing of the human readable data field The data field will print automatically in the default OCR B font unless the PDF suppress command is specified in the FONT parameter The human readable data field can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Optional parameter to identify the location of the printable data field The default value is B locating the human readable data below the bar code A locates the printable data field above the bar code To compensate for printing the 0 1 inch high data the height of the bar code body is reduced 0 1 inch Optional parameter to select the font for the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Enter S to suppress printing the data field and the trailing lower portions of the EAN bar code Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP continues in the Create Form mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Table 15 Left Side Data Field Format Number System Character Value Format for Left Side Data Field Positions N N 0 k OO N O C gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt uU U U U U U gt
283. the command parameters are separated into two lines During actual IGP input DO NOT separate command parameters Format ALPHA R E Cn DIR UC DARK POINT HSn or HSDn SR SC VE HE idi STEPMASK RPTn RSTn D STARTDATA D STOP Identifies this alohanumeric command as Incremental Alphanumeric command enter 1 idir The optional increment direction parameter to specify an increment add or decrement subtract to the data Enter a plus sign or leave the field blank to increment the default Enter a minus sign to decrement STEPMASK Defines the increment amount step the number of character positions in the data field and provides a mask to control the increment function on specific parts of the data Refer to Table 5 on page 35 for complete information on STEPMASK parameter values RPTn The optional incremental repeat count parameter to specify the number of times a particular field value is repeated before it is incremented A repeated field value is useful when printing multiple rows columns of identical labels before increasing to the next value To use the repeat count parameter enter RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging from 1 to 65 535 to specify the repeat count The default repeat count parameter is 1 which will increment the field value each time it prints 38 RSTn Alphanumerics Incremental Fixed Data Fields The optional incremental reset count p
284. the human readable data field Enter O to select OCR A font enter X to select OCR B font enter N to select 10 cpi enter P to select 12 cpi enter Q to select 13 cpi enter R to select 15 cpi enter T to select 17 cpi enter V to select 20 cpi Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP PGL continues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results Note Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO character is selectable from the printer s front panel see your User s Guide UPS 11 Example Figure 45 illustrates a vertical UPS 11 bar code generated by the following program BARCODE UPS11 VSCAN H9 34 15 01234567895 DF D EATE D 0 511 P STOE E EXE iCUT E UPS11 1 2 0 LLLI Figure 45 Sample UPS 11 Bar Code UPS 11 207 Chapter 3 Incremental Bar Code Fields Incremental Bar Code Fields With the incremental bar code fields feature you can update bar code and alphanumeric data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically with just one set of data sent from the host computer You can print up to 65 535 forms with incremental fields automatically updated Note Throughout the
285. three spaces that total 11 modules Code 128C Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent 100 pairs of numeric digits 00 through 99 and 3 control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 to 4 modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm 109 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Code 128 Command Format BARCODE C128A or C128B or C128C DIR Hn m BF n L DARK SR SC D data fiela D PDF LOC FONT STOP BARCODE The Bar Code command enter BARCODE C128A C128B or C128C Designates bar code type enter C128A C128B or C128C DIR Optional parameter that allows for rotating a barcode Enter CW for clockwise rotation Enter CCW or VSCAN for counter clockwise rotation Enter INV for inverted rotation If DIR is not entered the barcode is horizontally oriented MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density as shown in Table
286. tical Duplication command The line will have a single line thickness LT be in row R 30 4 starting in column SC 14 and ending in column EC 66 With vertical duplication the line will be duplicated dup 6 times with 2 5 row offset offset spacing between each duplication The Vertical Duplication command must be input the horizontal line being duplicated must be input and the Vertical Duplication command must be turned off Enter Format VDUP 6 2 5 VDUP dup offset HORZ HORZ 1 30 4 14 66 LT R SC EC STOP STOP VDUP OFF VDUP OFF 243 Chapter 4 Form Design 8 All the text shown on the grid is fixed into position on the form with a single Alpha command sequence The starting row starting column and text can be taken right from the grid and put into the program Enter ALPHA 14 31 53 2 HandCraft Boats 18 14 0 0 CUSTOMER 18 51 0 0 PHONE 20 14 0 0 HULL NO 20 49 0 0 RIGGING 22 14 0 0 COLOR 22 43 0 0 DELIVERY DATE 25 31 1 1 SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS 27 17 0 0 ITEM 27 34 0 0 DESCRIPTION 27 60 0 0 PRICE 50 26 1 1 Quality Boats Crafted By C17 48 14 0 0 HandCraft Boats C17 48 10 14 0 0 123 Boat C17 49 8 14 0 0 Boat Town 17 50 6 19 0 0 333444 C17 51 4 14 0 0 714 555 001 1 STOP Format ALPHA R E Cn AFn L DIR UC DARK SR SC VE HE D text D STOP 9 HandCraft Boats uses bar code type Code 128B C128B in many applications Use bar code C1
287. tinues in the Create Form Mode Enter STOP If STOP is not entered an error message results 145 Chapter 3 Bar Codes Matrix Example Figure 25 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Matrix bar code generated by the following program CREATE MATRIX Enter Create Form Mode BARCODE Bar Code command MATRIX DARK 27 49 Dark Code Matrix at SR 27 SC 49 24688642 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command BARCODE New Bar Code command MATRIX VSCAN H12 DARK 52 54 Vertical Dark Matrix H 1 2 at SR 52 SC 54 24688642 Data Field PDF Printable Data Field STOP Ends Bar Code command END Terminates Create Form Mode EXECUTE MATRIX 1 Execute the form form count of 1 SC 49 i LII 24688642 SC 54 lt q SR 52 Y Figure 25 Sample Matrix Bar Codes 146 MSI MSI The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 26 and described on the following pages rv rF 71 QUIETI IQUIETI SR sc SR sc POSITION ZONE POSITION IZONE 0 OPTIONAL CHECK I I I I I CCW BIGM ug CW I I I I I I OPTIONAL 1 READABLE DATA FIELD I I OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT UPPER I LOWER LOWER UPPER GUARD GUARD GUARD 3 1 GUARD BAND I BAND BAND BAND IQUIETI ZONE HEIGHT 9 HEIGHT OPTIONAL CHECK D
288. tly stored to deleted from and retrieved from the printer s flash memory by ending CREATE CREATE LOGO DELETE FORM DELETE LOGO EXECUTE and DIRECTORY commands with DISK For example the following command creates a form named ORDER and stores it on the flash memory cc CREATE ORDER DISK Executing a form or calling a logo will access the default flash automatically if the object is not found in memory 25 Chapter 2 IGP Command Standards Character Position Dot Position CP DP Format The CP DP format is a special parameter available with the IGP commands CP DP format allows two elements plotted at nearly the same character location to be offset to eliminate overlapping Specifying starting and ending rows and columns is its most frequent use Each character location is a cell Each cell is a grid 12 dot rows high by 6 dot columns wide printing at 6 Ipi and 10 cpi The CP DP format allows a character cell position CP and a specific dot position DP within the cell to be identified as shown in Figure 2 The DP portion of the CP DP format specifies a location down in reference to rows and to the right in reference to columns within the character cell position For example refer to Figure 2 Suppose a line runs along character position column 13 CP 13 At the same time an alphanumeric string must begin in column 13 With CP DP format the alphanumeric string can be offset 2 dot positions DP 2 i
289. ts For more information refer to the Directory Example on page 247 and the Delete Example on page 248 Example following command deletes the form named PAY from the directory IGP memory and the printer s flash memory DELETE FORM PAY DISK Delete Logo Delete Logo Purpose Deletes the logo identified by the logo name from the directory and the IGP memory Mode NORMAL Format cc DELETE LOGO logoname DISK cc The Special Function Control Code DELETE LOGO The Delete Form command enter DELETE LOGO logoname Identifies the logo to be deleted Enter the name of the logo exactly as it was created You can delete an entire logo directory by inputting ALL as the logo name DISK Optional parameter to delete the logo from the flash memory where it was originally stored Enter DISK Comments Printing a form that contains a deleted logo will produce an error message For more information refer to the Directory Example and the Delete Example on pages 205 and 207 Example The following command deletes the logo named MEMO from the directory IGP memory and the printer s flash memory DELETE LOGO MEMO DISK Directory Purpose Prints the following information 1 all defined forms and logos 2 logo assignment to forms and 3 memory usage and availability Mode NORMAL Format cc DIRECTORY DISK cc The Special Function Control Code DIRECTORY The D
290. ts are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 3 through 9 9 inches The default value is 0 9 inch The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale Note If 0 3 inches is the selected height the PDF cannot be u included 149 Chapter 3 Bar Codes BFn L DARK SR SC D 150 Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form and for designating the length of the data field With these parameters the actual data for the bar code data field is dynamically provided during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BFn L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce dar
291. umber system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing The optional 2 or 5 digit add on data field is placed at the end of the bar code data and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price respectively Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm EAN 13 EAN 13 Command Format BA
292. umeric and bar code data fields is explained in the following exercises Each stage includes printing the program however the total program may be entered as one unit Each stage offers the option of choosing features applicable to specific needs Basic Design The SAMPLE program below shown in Figure 47 is a basic design in CP DP format and defined by standard Create Form mode command sequences The label is duplicated twice horizontally on an approximate form size of 8 1 2 x 5 1 2 inches with three bar code locations specified per label The result is two forms two labels per form four labels printed on one 8 1 2 x 11 inch page On the next few pages you will add bar code data dynamic alphanumeric data and dynamic bar code data Then you will execute and print the complete form Figure 48 When entering command lines remember to correctly terminate each line with a line feed or carriage return with line feed Use your system commands to open a file for the label program When you have finished exit the file if necessary for your system and print CREATE SAMPLE 390 HDUP 2 37 BOX 273 57 9930735 STOP HORZ LELA Se 9235 1 519 55 935 1524 555 9735 STOP CORNER 44 21 9 33 1 222 25906 TT 13 6 3351 2 2 STOP ALPHA 4 8 12 0 0 FROM 6 3 14 2 2 FACME INC C15 7 3 16 0 0 17500 CARTWRIGHT RD C15 8 1 16 0 0 IRVINE CA 92714 1051250505 TO 142 8 115 0 205 830 19 8 11 0 0 S N 24 8 11
293. unique print position on the form Channel 1 The top of form code reserved as the first line on the form The operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form After the memory is loaded a Form Feed code FF 0C hex moves the paper to the next channel 1 top of form Channels 2 through 11 13 and 14 Used as general channel codes also referred to as line identification codes or as filler channels Each line on the form must be identified by a channel code When the operating program sends the channel code the paper advances to the line identified by the channel code Channel 12 Reserved as the vertical tab channel The vertical tab code VT hex rapidly advances the print position to the next line identified by the channel 12 code If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory a single line feed is executed when a VT code is sent End Load 1F or 6F Hex The end load code terminates the channel storage and saves the EVFU in memory Refer to Table 25 or Table 26 for the appropriate end load code Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code cause an EXECUTE EVFU load error Using the EVFU Sending the appropriate EVFU channel code to the printer causes any data in the buffer to print and slew the paper to the next line on the form having the specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory To recognize a data byte as an EVFU instruction one of t
294. using the KIX format for Royal Mail lowercase characters a through Z are also valid Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code The height of the bars Full Height has a maximum of 0 230 inches and a minimum of 0 165 inches Check Digit For PostBar you are responsible for encoding and check digit For Royal Mail a modulo 6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field KIX Format The KIX format for Royal Mail does not include the start stop code or the check digit 163 Chapter 3 Bar Codes PostBar and Royal Mail Command Format BARCODE POSTBAR or ROYALBAR KIX MAG BFn L DARK SR SC D data field D STOP BARCODE Bar Code command enter BARCODE POSTBAR or ROYALBAR Designates bar code type PostBar or Royal Mail enter POSTBAR or ROYALBAR KIX Optional parameter to specify the KIX format for Royal Mail bar codes only enter KIX MAG Optional parameter to magnify horizontally expand the bar code symbol The magnification default value is X1 As required for scanning enter a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the magnification Increasing the magnification adjusts printed character density X1A uses shorter bars to reach the minimum height specification that allows it to fiton a 6 LPI line BFn L Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar
295. vertical expansion of the bar code symbol including the upper and lower 0 1 inch guard bands and any human readable data Height adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments enter H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height adjustments from 0 4 through 9 9 inches The default value is 1 3 inches The m provides an additional number of dots for the bar code height Dots are in the current dot scale BFn Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar code data field location on a form With this parameter the actual data for the bar code data field is provided dynamically during the Execute Form mode the data is not specified during the Create Form mode To use this field a Enter BF b Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n 193 Chapter 3 Bar Codes DARK SR SC D data field 194 c length of the data field need not be specified since it is fixed at 6 or 11 digits plus any add on data d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes Enter DARK Refer t
296. wing steps a 40 Enter IAF to specify an incremental alphanumeric dynamic data field Replace n with a number ranging from 1 through 512 to identify the alphanumeric string location on the form The standard alphanumeric SR and SC command parameters specify the exact location of the field identified by n Replace L with a number equal to the number of characters in the dynamic alphanumeric string STARTDATA ranging from 1 through 280 Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form mode The length of the data must be equal to or less than the value assigned to the length L parameter Refer to Execute Form Incremental Dynamic Data on page 65 for more information Alphanumerics Incremental Dynamic Data Fields Comments The Incremental Alphanumeric Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of the standard IGP Alphanumeric command but does not replace the standard alphanumeric command As with standard dynamic data fields incremental dynamic data fields allow the starting data to be changed without changing the form definition program Increment parameters can also change with each new job without changing the form definition program Duplicating Incremental Alphanumeric Fields Incremental alphanumeric fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated horizontally using the HDUP command and vertically using the standard VDUP command Duplicated incremental fields increment in left to righ
297. xt Spaces Spaces are used in the general command formats to visually separate individual command parameters Supply the appropriate information for the command parameter but do not enter the spaces in the command sequence they are shown simply as a visual aid to illustrate where one command parameter ends and another begins Command Parameters Most commands include a number of parameters Some are optional and some are required Each parameter must be separated by a semicolon unless noted otherwise Throughout this manual actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they must be entered and all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets but do not enter the brackets Parentheses indicate variable data You have a choice of what to enter but you must enter something Do not enter the parentheses by themselves Form Name You must use alphanumeric characters to identify the document form or logo you are creating a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters The Form Name is also used to identify the form during the Execute Form Mode The valid Form Name characters are listed in Table 4 and also apply to Logo Name The SFCC can also be used in the Form Name No spaces are allowed between any of the Form Name characters 24 Prompt Table 4 Valid Form Name Characters A through Z upper and lowercase Left and right parenthesis
298. xt denser black backgrounds for reverse print and extra dark more readable bar codes DARK parameter used with alphanumeric text in the ALPHA command will print using a bold font The extra darkness provided by the DARK parameter improves the Print Contrast Ratio PCR and effectively extends the life of the ribbon For bar codes the PCR describes the difference in light reflection between the bars and spaces as a measurement of light dark contrast in order to judge when a printed bar code will not be dark enough to be read with accuracy by a scanner The extra dots used to produce the darker bar code do not change the overall width of the wide bars Figure 3 illustrates how the DARK parameter adds two extra dot columns to wide bar code bars without increasing bar width Due to the second hammer bank stroke required to plot the extra columns of dots print speed may be reduced up to half when the DARK parameter is used with Bar Code commands However this decreased print speed should be weighed against the significant increase in bar code PCR and extended ribbon life BEE oF pors PTT TTT TT TT 271 T 4 L L 4 4 4 P ee YS DARK MODE Figure 3 Dark Printing Alphanumerics Alphanumerics Purpose Defines and positions alphanumeric data on a form as a preprinted static data field or as a dynamic data field Mode CREATE Format ALPHA R E Cn AF n L DIR UC
299. y the bar code field The SR and SC parameters specify the exact location of the bar code field identified by n c Replace L with a number equaling the total number of characters in the field The actual data provided dynamically during the Execute Form Mode can be less than L d The information for the data field is entered dynamically during the Execute Form Mode Refer to Execute Form Dynamic Bar Code Data on page 63 Do not use the data field parameter to enter data when the BF n L parameters are used However refer to the data field description for available characters Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar codes Enter DARK Refer to Dark Printing on page 28 for more information Defines the starting row for the bar code Enter a value ranging from row 1 to one less than the length of the form Character row or dot row is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 Defines the starting column of the bar code Enter a value ranging from column 1 to one less than the width of the form Character column or dot column is specified based on the Scale command page 83 or use the CP DP format page 26 The printable character delimiter identifying the start and finish of the data field Enter any printable character other than a slash the SFCC or a character used within the data The same character must be used at both ends of the data field but it will not pri

Printronix LQH-HWTM Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents